2016 Hyundai H-1 (Grand Starex) User Manual

OWNER'S MANUAL

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.

However, in line with the Hyundai policy of continual product improvement,

the right to amend or change specifications without prior notice or obliga-

tion to incorporate such amendments or changes into vehicles already pro-

duced, is reserved.

This manual applies to all current Hyundai models and includes descrip-

tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a

result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your spe-

cific vehicle.

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way without the approval of Hyundai. Any modifications

may adversely affect the safety, durability and performance of your Hyundai. In addition, those com-

ponents which are subjected to modification or are added to the vehicle specification, and any result-

ant consequential damage will not be covered by the vehicle manufacturer's warranty.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible

for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio to adversely affect electronic systems. For this rea-

son, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your

Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR MOBILE TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

✽

NOTICE

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other

persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the

caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive

Hyundai. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very

proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-

fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorised Hyundai deal-

er. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : If for any reason in the future you should sell your Hyundai, please leave this manual in the vehicle for the new owner's use.

system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.

CAUTION

Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet

Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page

9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

The compliance plate shows that your vehicle has been tested and found to comply with all relevant

Australian Design Rules (ADR's) applicable at its date of manufacture.

Any part, that is subject to these ADR's, must not be removed or altered and is to be maintained in

good order at all times for the vehicle to be roadworthy and re-registerable by all registerable author-

ities.

Consult an Authorised Hyundai Motors Dealer before conducting any repairs that may affect these

areas or if requiring further classification on design rules or safety features. Failure to observe the

above warning may render the vehicle compliance invalid and result in personal injury which may have

otherwise been avoided.

AUSTRALIAN DESIGN RULES

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Consumer information

Specifications

Index

table of contents

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-2

Vehicle handling instructions / 1-6

Vehicle run-in process / 1-6

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-7

Introduction

A010000AUN-EA

We want to help you get the greatest

possible driving pleasure from your vehi-

cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you

in many ways. We strongly recommend

that you read the entire manual. In order

to minimise the chance of death or injury,

you must read the WARNING and CAU-

TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this

manual to best explain how to enjoy your

vehicle. By reading your manual, you

learn about features, important safety

information, and driving tips under vari-

ous road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is pro-

vided in the Table of Contents. A good

place to start is the index; it has an alpha-

betical listing of all information in your

manual.

Sections: This manual has nine sections

plus an index. Each section begins with a

brief list of contents so you can tell at a

glance if that section has the information

you want.

You’ll find various WARNING’s,

CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this manu-

al. These were prepared to enhance your

personal safety.You should carefully read

and follow ALL procedures and recom-

mendations provided in these

WARNING’s, CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s.

✽

NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-

ful information is being provided.

Petrol engine

A020101AEN-EA

Unleaded

Your new HYUNDAI vehicle is designed

to use only unleaded fuel having an

Octane Rating of RON (Research

Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) 87 or higher. (Do not use

methanol blended fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain

maximum performance with UNLEADED

FUEL, as well as minimise exhaust emis-

sions and spark plug fouling.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which harm, serious bodily injury or

death could result if the warning is

ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which damage to your vehicle could

result if the caution is ignored.

CAUTION

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The

use of leaded fuel is detrimental to

the catalytic converter and will

damage the engine control sys-

tem’s oxygen sensor and affect

emission control.

Never add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than

what has been specified. (Consult

an authorised HYUNDAI dealer for

details.)

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Introduction

A020103AUN-EA

Petrol containing alcohol and

methanol

Ethanol [E-10], a mixture of petrol and

ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),

and petrol or ethanol containing

methanol (also known as wood alcohol)

are being marketed along with or instead

of leaded or unleaded petrol.

Do not use ethanol containing more than

10% ethanol, and do not use petrol or

ethanol containing any methanol. Either

of these fuels may cause drivability prob-

lems and damage to the fuel system,

engine control system and emission con-

trol system.

Discontinue using ethanol of any kind if

drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability problems

may not be covered by the manufactur-

er’s warranty if they result from the use

of:

1. Ethanol containing more than 10%.

2. Petrol or ethanol containing methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded ethanol.

Other fuels

Using fuels such as;

- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,

- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained fuel,

- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and

- Other metallic additives contained fuels,

may cause vehicle and engine damage

or cause plugging, misfiring, poor accel-

eration, engine stalling, catalyst melting,

abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction,

etc.

Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) may illuminate.

✽

NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or perform-

ance problem caused by the use of these

fuels may not be covered by your New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refuelling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

CAUTION

Never use ethanol which contains

methanol. Discontinue use of any

ethanol product which impairs dri-

vability.

Introduction

A020104AEN-EA

Use of MTBE

HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels

containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl

Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content

2.7% weight) in your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may

reduce vehicle performance and produce

vapour lock or hard starting.

A020105AUN-EA

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-

hol) should not be used in your vehicle.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-

formance and damage components of

the fuel system, engine control system

and emission control system.

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use

unleaded petrol which has an Octane

Rating of RON (Research Octane

Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87

or higher.

For customers who do not use good

quality petrols including fuel additives

regularly, and have problems starting or

the engine does not run smoothly, one

bottle of additives should be added to the

fuel tank at every 15,000km. Additives

are available from your authorised

HYUNDAI dealer along with information

on how to use them. Do not mix other

additives.

A020107AUN

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in

another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding reg-

istration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-

able.

CAUTION

HYUNDAI Warranty Policy will not

cover damage to the fuel system

and performance problems that are

caused by the use of methanol or

fuels containing methanol.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

may not cover damage to the fuel

system and any performance prob-

lems that are caused by the use of

fuels containing methanol or fuels

containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary

Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Introduction

Diesel engine

A020201DUN-EA

Diesel fuel

Diesel engine must be operated only on

commercially available diesel fuel that

complies with EN 590 or comparable

standard. (EN stands for "European

Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,

heating oils, or non-approved fuel addi-

tives, as this will increase wear and

cause damage to the engine and fuel

system. The use of non-approved fuels

and / or fuel additives will result in a limi-

tation of your warranty rights.

Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in

your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel

are available, use summer or winter fuel

properly according to the following tem-

perature conditions.

• Above -5°C(23°F) ... Summer type

diesel fuel.

• Below -5°C(23°F) ... Winter type diesel

fuel.

Watch the fuel level in the tank very care-

fully : If the engine stops through fuel fail-

ure, the circuits must be completely

purged to permit restarting.

A020202BUN

Biodiesel

Commercially supplied Diesel blends of

no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly

known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in

your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214

or equivalent specifications. (EN stands

for "European Norm"). The use of biofu-

els exceeding 7% made from rapeseed

methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl

ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester

(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding

7% with biodiesel will cause increased

wear or damage to the engine and fuel

system. Repair or replacement of worn or

damaged components due to the use of

non approved fuels will not be covered by

the manufactures warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let any petrol or water enter

the tank. This would make it neces-

sary to drain it out and to bleed the

lines to avoid jamming the injection

pump and damaging the engine.

CAUTION - Diesel Fuel

(if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regu-

lated automotive diesel fuel for

diesel vehicle equipped with the

DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high

sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)

and unspecified additives, it can

cause the DPF system to be dam-

aged and white smoke can be emit-

ted.

Introduction

Biodiesel (for New Zealand)

Commercially supplied Diesel blends of

no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly

known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in

your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214

or equivalent specifications. (EN stands

for "European Norm"). The use of biofu-

els exceeding 7%, made from rapeseed

methyl ester (RME), vegetable oil methyl

ester (VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceed-

ing 7% with biodiesel will cause

increased wear or damage to the engine

and fuel system. Repair or replacement

of worn or damaged components due to

the use of non approved fuels will not be

covered by the manufactures warranty.

A090000AEN-EA

As with other vehicles of this type, failure

to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control, an accident or

vehicle rollover.

Specific design characteristics (higher

ground clearance, track, etc.) give this

vehicle a higher centre of gravity than

other types of vehicles. In other words

they are not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as conventional 2-wheel

drive vehicles. Avoid sharp turns or

abrupt manoeuvres. Again, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result

in loss of control, an accident or vehicle

rollover. Be sure to read the “Reducing

the risk of a rollover” driving guide-

lines, in section 5 of this manual.

A030000AUN-EA

No special run-in period is needed. By

following a few simple precautions for the

first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to

the performance, economy and life of

your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• Whilst driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute)

between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for long

periods of time, either fast or slow.

Varying engine speed is needed to

properly run-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-

cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-

erly.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000

km (1,200 miles) of operation.

VEHICLE RUN-IN PROCESSVEHICLE HANDLING

INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

• Never use any fuel, whether

diesel or B7 biodiesel or other-

wise, that fails to meet the latest

petroleum industry specification.

• Never use any fuel additives or

treatments that are not recom-

mended or approved by the vehi-

cle manufacturer.

Introduction

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Seat belt warning light

High beam indicator

Turn signal indicator

ABS warning light (if equipped)

Parking brake & Brake fluid warning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Malfunction indicator (if equipped)

Air bag warning light (if equipped)

Immobiliser indicator

Low fuel level warning light

Glow indicator (Diesel only)

Fuel filter warning light (Diesel only)

❈ For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.

Charging system warning light

A050000CTQ-EA

Door ajar warning light

Overspeed warning light (if equipped)

120

km/h

Tailgate open warning light

O/D OFF indicator (if equipped)

O/D

OFF

ESC* indicator (if equipped)

ESC* OFF indicator (if equipped)

* : Some countries use the term ESP (Electronic stability pro-

gram) instead of ESC. Please refer to the term your country

use.

Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button* ...................4-10

2. Outside rearview mirror control

switch*...............................................4-30

3. Central door lock switch* ..................4-11

4. Power window switches*...................4-16

5. Air vent..............................................4-59

6. Front fog light switch*........................4-50

7. Rear fog light switch* .......................4-50

8. Head lamp levelling device*..............4-51

9. Instrument panel illumination control

knob*.................................................4-33

10. Steering wheel tilt control* ..............4-26

11. Steering wheel ................................4-26

12. Fuse box .........................................7-47

13. Bonnet release lever.......................4-21

14. Brake pedal.....................................5-18

15. Accelerator pedal..............................5-6

16. Seat...................................................3-2

17. Fuel filler lid release button.............4-23

* : if equipped

OTQ027001R

B010000ATQ-EA

Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Instrument cluster.............................4-32

2. Light control / Turn signals ...............4-47

3. Horn .................................................4-27

4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-52

5. Steering wheel audio controls* ........4-79

6. Driver’s front air bag* .......................3-40

7. Ignition switch.....................................5-4

8. Digital clock* ....................................4-76

9. Audio*...............................................4-78

10. Hazard warning flasher

switch ......................................4-47, 6-2

11. Climate control system* .................4-58

12. Parking brake .................................5-19

13. Shift lever ................................5-11, 5-8

14. AUX, USB and iPod port* ..............4-80

15. Passenger’s front air bag*..............3-41

16. Glove box .......................................4-71

* : if equipped

OTQ027002R

B020000BTQ

Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-22

2. Automatic transmission fluid

dipstick*.............................................7-23

3. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-17

4. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-21

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-46

6. Negative battery terminal..................7-33

7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-33

8. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-18

9. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-17

10. Radiator cap ...................................7-20

11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir...7-25

12. Air cleaner.......................................7-27

* : if equipped

OTQ077066R

B030000ATQ

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Seats / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-14

Child restraint system / 3-25

Air bag - supplemental restraint system / 3-34

Safety features of your vehicle

C010000ATQ-EA

Front seat

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)*

(4) Seat warmer (Driver’s seat)*

(5) Headrest

2nd row seat* / 3rd row seat*

(6) Forward and backward

(7) Seatback angle

(8) Headrest

4th row seat*

(9) Forward and backward

(10) Seat cushion folding

(11) Headrest

*: if equipped

SEATS

OTQ037001R

The actual seats in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

- Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust the seat

whilst the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control,

and an accident causing death,

serious injury, or property dam-

age.

• Do not allow anything to interfere

with the normal position of the

seatback. Storing items against a

seatback or in any other way

interfering with proper locking of

a seatback could result in serious

or fatal injury in a sudden stop or

collision.

• Always drive and ride with your

seatback upright and the lap por-

tion of the seat belt snug and low

across the hips. This is the best

position to protect you in case of

an accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessary

injuries from air bag deployment,

always sit as far back as possible

from the steering wheel whilst

maintaining comfortable control

of the vehicle. We recommend

that your chest be at least 250

mm (10 inches) away from the

steering wheel.

WARNING - Uprighting

seat

When you return the seatback to its

upright position, hold the seatback

and return it slowly and be sure

there are no other occupants

around the seat. If the seatback is

returned without being held and

controlled, the back of the seat

could spring forward resulting in

accidental injury to a person struck

by the seatback.

WARNING

- Loose objects

Loose objects in the driver’s foot

area could interfere with the opera-

tion of the foot pedals, possibly

causing an accident. Do not place

anything under the front seats.

WARNING

- Driver respon-

sibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with the seat-

back reclined could lead to serious

or fatal injury in an accident. If a

seat is reclined during an accident,

the occupant’s hips may slide

under the lap portion of the seat

belt applying great force to the

unprotected abdomen. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could result.

The driver must advise the front

passenger to keep the seatback in

an upright position whenever the

vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Do not use a sitting cushion that

reduces friction between the seat

and passenger. The passenger's

hips may slide under the lap por-

tion of the seat belt during an acci-

dent or a sudden stop. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could result

because the seat belt can't operate

normally.

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• To avoid the possibility of burns,

do not remove the carpet in the

cargo area. Emission control

devices beneath this floor gener-

ate high temperatures.

WARNING

- Rear seatbacks

• The rear seatback must be

securely latched. If not, passen-

gers and objects could be thrown

forward resulting in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop or collision.

• Luggage and other cargo should

be laid flat in the cargo area. If

objects are large, heavy, or must

be piled, they must be secured.

Under no circumstances should

cargo be piled higher than the

seatbacks. Failure to follow these

warnings could result in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop, collision or rollover.

• No passenger should ride in the

cargo area or sit or lie on folded

seatbacks whilst the vehicle is

moving. All passengers must be

properly seated in seats and

restrained properly whilst riding.

• When resetting the seatback to

the upright position, make sure it

is securely latched by pushing it

forward and backwards.

(Continued)

WARNING

After adjusting the seat, always

check that it is securely locked into

place by attempting to move the

seat forward or backward without

using the lock release lever.

Sudden or unexpected movement

of the driver's seat could cause you

to lose control of the vehicle result-

ing in an accident.

WARNING

• Use extreme caution so that

hands or other objects are not

caught in the seat mechanisms

whilst the seat is moving.

• Do not put a cigarette lighter on

the floor or seat. When you oper-

ate the seat, gas may gush out of

the lighter and cause fire.

• If there are occupants in the rear

seats, be careful whilst adjusting

the front seat position.

• Use extreme caution when pick-

ing small objects trapped under

the seats or between the seat and

the centre console. Your hands

might be cut or injured by the

sharp edges of the seats mecha-

nism.

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment

C010101AUN

Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-

ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by trying

to move forward and backward without

using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

C010102AUN

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the

seatback recline lever located on the

outside of the seat at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and

adjust the seatback of the seat to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The lever

MUST return to its original position for

the seatback to lock.)

C010103AUN

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat cushion,

push the lever that is located on the out-

side of the seat cushion upwards or

downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever

up several times.

OTQ037002/H OTQ037004/HOTQ037003/H

Safety features of your vehicle

C010107CTQ-EA

Seat warmer

(Driver’s seat, if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the

driver’s seat during cold weather. With

the ignition switch in the ON position,

push the switch to warm the driver's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions

where the operation of the seat warmer

is not needed, keep the switch in the

"OFF" position.

• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF

position whenever the ignition switch is

turned on.

✽

NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in ON

position, the heating system in the seat

turns off or on automatically depending

on the seat temperature.

WARNING

- Seat warmer

burns

Passengers should use extreme

caution when using seat warmers

due to the possibility of excess

heating or burns. The seat warmer

may cause burns even at low tem-

peratures, especially if used for

long periods of time. In particular,

the driver must exercise extreme

care for the following types of pas-

sengers:

1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-

icapped persons, or hospital out-

patients

2. Persons with sensitive skin or

those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold

tablets, etc.)

CAUTION

• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such as

thinner, benzene, alcohol or

petrol. Doing so may damage the

surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat

warmer, do not place anything on

the seats that insulates against

heat, such as blankets, cushions

or seat covers whilst the seat

warmer is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped with

seat warmer. Damage to the seat

warming components could occur.

• Do not change the seat cover. It

may damage the seat warmer or

airventilation system.

OTQ037008R

Safety features of your vehicle

C010104BTQ

Headrest

The driver's and front passenger's seats are

equipped with a headrest for the occupant's

safety and comfort. The headrest not only

provides comfort for the driver and front

passenger, but also helps to protect the

head and neck in the event of a collision.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the

desired position (1). To lower the head-

rest, push and hold the release button (2)

on the headrest support and lower the

headrest to the desired position (3).

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in case

of an accident, the headrest should

be adjusted so the middle of the

headrest is at the same height of the

center of gravity of an occupant's

head. Generally, the center of gravi-

ty of most people's head is similar

with the height of the top of their

eyes. Also, adjust the headrest as

close to your head as possible. For

this reason, the use of a cushion

that holds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle with the

headrests removed as severe injury

to the occupants may occur in the

event of an accident. Headrests may

provide protection against neck

injuries when properly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrest position

of the driver's seat whilst the vehicle

is in motion.

OFD037037

OYFH034205

CAUTION

If you recline the seatback towards

the front with the head restraint and

seat cushion raised, the head

restraint may come in contact with

the sunvisor or other parts of the

vehicle.

Safety features of your vehicle

Removal

To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline lever (1).

2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button (3)

whilst pulling the headrest up (4).

Reinstall

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes whilst pressing the release but-

ton (1).

2. Recline the seatback (4) with the

recline lever (3).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate

height.

C010108AUN

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

The seatback pocket is provided on the

back of the front passenger’s and driver’s

seatbacks.

WARNING - Seatback

pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects

in the seatback pockets. In an acci-

dent they could come loose from

the pocket and injure vehicle occu-

pants.

OTQ037036OTQ033201

WARNING

Always make sure the headrest

locks into position after reinstalling

and adjusting it properly.

OTQ033200

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a

seat with the headrest removed.

Safety features of your vehicle

Rear seat adjustment

C010301ATQ

Forward and backward (2nd and 3rd

row, if equipped)

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-

ion and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by trying

to move forward and backward without

using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

C010302ATQ-EA

Seatback angle (if equipped)

OTQ037012

OTQ037012G

OTQ037015

Type A

Type B

Type C

OTQ037011

OTQ037011G

Type B

Type A

Safety features of your vehicle

103

To recline the seatback:

1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.

2. Carefully lean back the seat and adjust

the seatback to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The lever

MUST return to its original position for

the seatback to lock.)

C010303CTQ-EA

Headrest

The rear seats is equipped with head-

rests in the outboard seating positions

(except centre seating position) for the

occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort

for passengers, but also helps to protect

the head and neck in the event of a colli-

sion.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the

desired position (1). To lower the head-

rest, push and hold the release button (2)

on the headrest support and lower the

headrest to the desired position (3).

OHM038017

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest

should be adjusted so the middle

of the headrest is at the same

height as the top of the occu-

pant's eyes. The use of a cushion

that holds the body away from

the seatback is not recommend-

ed.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severe

injury to an occupant may occur

in the event of an accident.

Headrests may provide protec-

tion against severe neck injuries

when properly adjusted.

• When there is no occupant in the

rear seats, adjust the height of

the headrest to the lowest posi-

tion. The rear seat headrest can

reduce the visibility of the rear

area.

311

Safety features of your vehicle

Removal

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as

it can go then press the release button

(1) whilst pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the head-

rest poles (3) into the holes whilst press-

ing the release button (1). Then adjust it

to the appropriate height.

C010304ATQ-EA

Centre seat folding (if equipped)

1. Stow the rear seat belt in the pocket to

prevent the seat belt from being dam-

aged.

2. Pull the release knob and fold the

seatback forward.

3. Fold up the seat.

OHM038018N OTQ037031

WARNING - Uprighting

seat

When you return the seatback to its

upright position, hold the seatback

and return it slowly. If the seatback

is returned without holding it, the

back of the seat could spring for-

ward resulting in injury caused by

being struck by the seatback.

WARNING

Make sure the headrest locks in

position after adjusting it to proper-

ly protect the occupants.

CAUTION - Rear seat belts

When returning the rear (2nd and/or

3rd row) seatbacks to the upright

position, remember to return the

rear shoulder belts to their proper

position. Routing the seat belt web-

bing through the rear seat belt

guides will help keep the belts from

being trapped behind or under the

seats.

CAUTION - Damaging rear

seat belt buckles

When you fold the rear (2nd and/or

3rd row) seatback, insert the buckle

in the pocket between the rear seat-

back and cushion. Doing so can

prevent the buckle from being dam-

aged by the rear seatback.

Safety features of your vehicle

123

C010307ATQ

Folding the rear seat

(4th row seat, if equipped)

The rear seat cushion may be folded to

facilitate carrying long items or to

increase the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

To fold the rear seat:

1. Stow the rear seat belt in the pocket

to prevent the seat belt from being

damaged.

2. Set the 3rd row seatback to the upright

position and if necessary, slide the 3rd

row seat forward.

3. Pull on the seat cushion folding lever,

then fold the seat toward the rear of

the vehicle.

4. Increase the luggauge compartment

space by moving the rear seat using

the sliding lever.

WARNING

The purpose of the fold rear seat is

to allow you to carry longer objects

that could not be accommodated in

the cargo area.

Never allow passengers to sit on a

improper position (ex : top of the

folded seat, floor etc.) whilst the car

is moving as this is not a proper

seating position and no seat belts

are available for use. This could

result in serious injury or death in

case of an accident or sudden stop.

Objects carried on the cargo area

should not extend higher than the

top of the front seatbacks. Doing

this could allow cargo to slide for-

ward and cause injury or damage

during sudden stops.

OTQ037016

OTQ037017

313

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

When you return the rear seat

cushion to its locking position after

being folded:

Be careful not to damage the seat

belt webbing or buckle. Do not

allow the seat belt webbing or

buckle to get caught or pinched in

the rear seat. Ensure that the seat

is completely locked into its proper

position by pushing the seat cush-

ion and seatback.

Otherwise, in an accident or sud-

den stop, the seat could fold, which

could result in serious injury or

death.

OUN026140

WARNING

The headrest on the seat (especial-

ly the last row seat) should be

adjusted so the middle of the head-

rest is at the same height as the top

of the occupant's eyes.

If the tailgate is pushed down to

close when a passenger's head is

not against a properly adjusted

headrest or a tall person is seated,

the tailgate may hit the occupant's

head, which could cause injury.

WARNING

- Cargo

Cargo should always be secured to

prevent it from being thrown about

the vehicle in a collision and caus-

ing injury to the vehicle occupants.

Do not place objects in the rear

seats, since they cannot be proper-

ly secured and may hit the front

seat occupants in a collision.

WARNING - Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, the

automatic transmission is in P

(Park) or the manual transmission

is in R (Reverse) or 1st, and the

parking brake is securely applied

whenever loading or unloading

cargo. Failure to take these steps

may allow the vehicle to move if the

shift lever is inadvertently moved to

another position.

Safety features of your vehicle

143

C020100CUN-EA

Seat belt restraint system

The use of seat belts reduces the risk of

accident injury by avoiding collision with

the interior of the car and by preventing

the occupants from being thrown out of

the car. This makes them the most impor-

tant safety feature available for you and

your passengers. Adequate protection is

afforded only when the belt is worn cor-

rectly. You should always fasten and

adjust your seatbelts before the car is put

in motion and encourage your passen-

gers to do the same.

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

• For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts must

always be used whenever the car

is moving.

• Seat belts are most effective

when seatbacks are in the

upright position.

• Children age 12 and younger

must always be properly

restrained in the rear seat. Never

allow children to ride in the front

passenger seat.

(Continued)

WARNING

Seat belts are designed to bear upon

the bony structure of the body, and

should be worn low across the front

of the pelvis, or the pelvis, chest and

shoulders, as applicable; wearing the

lap section of the belt across the

abdominal area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection for

which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the

protection afforded to the wearer.

Care should be taken to avoid con-

tamination of the webbing with pol-

ishes, oils and chemicals and partic-

ularly battery acid. Cleaning may

safely be carried out using mild soap

and water. The belt should be

replaced if webbing becomes frayed,

contaminated or damaged. It is

essential to replace the entire assem-

bly after it has been worn in a severe

impact even if damage to the assem-

bly is not obvious. Belts should not

be worn with straps twisted. Each

seat belt assembly must only be

used by one occupant; it is danger-

ous to put a belt around a child being

carried on the occupant's lap.

(Continued)

If a child over 12 must be seated

in the front seat, he/she must be

properly belted and the seat

should be moved as far back as

possible.

• Never wear a seat belt over frag-

ile objects. If there is a sudden

stop or impact, the seat belt can

damage it.

• Never wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back. An improperly positioned

shoulder belt can cause serious

injuries in a crash. The shoulder

belt should be positioned midway

over your shoulder across your

collarbone.

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.

A twisted belt can't do its job as

well. In a collision, it could even

cut into you. Be sure the belt

webbing is straight and not twist-

ed.

• Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. If the belt

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged, replace it.

315

Safety features of your vehicle

D150302AEN-EA

Seat belt warning (if equipped)

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt

warning light will blink for approximately

6 seconds each time you turn the ignition

switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after

the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt

warning light blinks again for approxi-

mately 6 seconds.

Seat belt warning chime (if equipped)

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened

when the ignition switch is turned ON or

if it is unfastened after the ignition switch

is ON, the seat belt warning chime will

sound for approximately 6 seconds.

Once the seat belt is fastened the chime

will stop.

C020102AEN

Lap/shoulder belt

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the

retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into

the buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the

proper length only after the lap belt por-

tion is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips. If you lean for-

ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will

extend and let you move around. If there

is a sudden stop or impact, however, the

belt will lock into position. It will also lock

if you try to lean forward too quickly.

1GQA2083

B180A01NF-E

WARNING

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the seat

belt adjusting devices from oper-

ating to remove slack, or prevent

the seat belt assembly from being

adjusted to remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt, be

careful not to latch the seat belt in

buckles of other seat. It's very dan-

gerous and you may not be pro-

tected by the seat belt properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt and

do not fasten and unfasten the

seat belt repeatedly whilst driv-

ing. This could result in loss of

control, and an accident causing

death, serious injury, or property

damage.

• When fastening the seat belt,

make sure that the seat belt does

not pass over objects that are

hard or can break easily.

• Make sure there is nothing in the

buckle. The seat belt may not be

fastened securely.

Safety features of your vehicle

163

✽

NOTICE

If you are not able to pull out the seat

belt from the retractor, firmly pull the

belt out and release it. Then you will be

able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment (if equipped)

You can adjust the height of the shoulder

belt anchor to one of 5 positions for max-

imum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt

should not be too near your neck. The

shoulder portion should be adjusted so

that it lies across your chest and midway

over your shoulder nearest the door and

not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster

into an appropriate position.

B200A02NF/H

WARNING

You should place the lap belt por-

tion as low as possible and snugly

across your hips, not on your waist.

If the lap belt is located too high on

your waist, it may increase the

chance of injury in the event of a

collision. Both arms should not be

under or over the belt. Rather, one

should be over and the other under,

as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the

arm nearest the door.

OEN036029

Front seat

317

Safety features of your vehicle

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).

To lower it, push it down (3) whilst press-

ing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has locked

into position.

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the

release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should auto-

matically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to

be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

C020103AUN-EA

Lap belt (if equipped)

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten a 2-point static type belt, insert

the metal tab (1) into the locking buckle

(2). There will be an audible "click" when

the tab locks into the buckle. Check to

make sure the belt is properly locked and

that the belt is not twisted.

B210A01NF-E

B220A04NF-1

WARNING

• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro-

priate height. Never position the

shoulder belt across your neck or

face. Improperly positioned seat

belts can cause serious injuries

in an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts after

an accident could leave you with

damaged seat belts that will not

provide protection in the event of

another collision leading to per-

sonal injury or death. Replace

your seat belts after being in an

accident as soon as possible.

Safety features of your vehicle

183

With a 2-point static type seat belt, the

length must be adjusted manually so it

fits snugly around your body. Fasten the

belt and pull on the loose end to tighten.

The belt should be placed as low as pos-

sible on your hips, not on your waist. If

the belt is too high, it could increase the

possibility of your being injured in an

accident.

When using the rear centre seat belt, the

buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be

used.

To release the seat belt:

When you want to release the seat belt,

press the button (1) in the locking buckle.

OTQ037020

OHM039105N

B220B01NF

Too high

Shorten

Correct

B210A02NF-1

WARNING

The centre lap belt latching mecha-

nism is different from those for the

rear seat shoulder belts. When fas-

tening the rear seat shoulder belts

or the centre lap belt, make sure

they are inserted into the correct

buckles to obtain maximum protec-

tion from the seat belt system and

assure proper operation.

319

Safety features of your vehicle

C020105AUN-EA

Stowing the rear seat belt

• The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed in the pocket between the rear

seatback and cushion when not in use.

• The centre seat belt can be stowed

with the plate and webbing rolled in the

pocket between the rear seatback and

cushion.

C020200DEN-EA

Pre-tensioner seat belt

(if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and

front passenger's pre-tensioner seat

belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is

to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly

against the wearer's body in certain

frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat

belts may be activated in crashes where

the frontal collision is severe enough.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if

the occupant tries to lean forward too

quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock

into position. In certain frontal collisions,

the pre-tensioner will activate and pull

the seat belt into tighter contact against

the occupant's body.

OED030300/H

OTQ037021

OTQ037022

OTQ037022G

Type A

Type B

Type C

Safety features of your vehicle

203

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

✽

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be

activated in certain frontal collisions.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are

activated, a loud noise may be heard

and fine dust, which may appear to be

smoke, may be visible in the passenger

compartment. These are normal oper-

ating conditions and are not haz-

ardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dust

may cause skin irritation and should

not be breathed for prolonged peri-

ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-

oughly after an accident in which the

pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-

ed.

WARNING

To obtain maximum benefit from a

pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn cor-

rectly and adjusted to the proper

position. Please read and follow

all of the important information

and precautions about your vehi-

cle’s occupant safety features –

including seat belts and air bags

– that are provided in this manu-

al.

2. Be sure you and your passen-

gers always wear seat belts prop-

erly.

1KMB3311/H

WARNING

For your safety, be sure that the

belt webbing is not loose or twisted

and always sit properly on your

seat.

321

Safety features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

Because the sensor that activates the

SRS air bag is connected with the pre-

tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag

warning light on the instrument

panel will illuminate for approximately

6 seconds after the ignition switch has

been turned to the ON position, and

then it should turn off.

WARNING

• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-

vation, pre-tensioner seat belts

must be replaced. All seat belts,

of any type, should always be

replaced after they have been

worn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat belt

assembly mechanisms become

hot during activation. Do not

touch the pre-tensioner seat belt

assemblies for several minutes

after they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect or

replace the pre-tensioner seat

belts yourself. We recommend

that the system be inspected by

an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies.

• Do not attempt to service or

repair the pre-tensioner seat belt

system in any manner.

(Continued)

• Improper handling of the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt assemblies, and

failure to heed the warnings not

to strike, modify, inspect, replace,

service or repair the pre-tension-

er seat belt assemblies may lead

to improper operation or inadver-

tent activation and serious injury.

• Always wear the seat belts when

driving or riding in a motor vehi-

cle.

• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner

seat belt must be discarded, we

recommend that you contact an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not

working properly, this warning light

will illuminate even if there is no

malfunction of the SRS air bag.

If the SRS air bag warning light

does not illuminate when the igni-

tion key is turned to ON, or if it

remains illuminated after illuminat-

ing for approximately 6 seconds, or

if it illuminates whilst the vehicle is

being driven, we recommend that

the system be inspected by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Body work on the front area of the

vehicle may damage the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt system.

Therefore, we recommend that the

system be serviced by an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

Safety features of your vehicle

223

C020300AUN

Seat belt precautions

C020306AUN-EA

Infant or small child

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child

and/or infant seats must be properly

placed and installed in the rear seat. For

more information about the use of these

restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tem” in this section.

✽

NOTICE

Small children are best protected from

injury in an accident when properly

restrained in the rear seat by a child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of the Safety Standards of your

country. Before buying any child

restraint system, make sure that it has a

label certifying that it meets Safety

Standards in your country. The restraint

must be appropriate for your child's

height and weight. Check the label on

the child restraint for this information.

Refer to “Child restraint system” in this

section.

WARNING

Every person in your vehicle needs

to be properly restrained at all

times, including infants and chil-

dren. Never hold a child in your

arms or lap when riding in a vehi-

cle. The violent forces created dur-

ing a crash will tear the child from

your arms and throw the child

against the interior. Always use a

child restraint appropriate for your

child's height and weight.

WARNING

All occupants of the vehicle must

wear their seat belts at all times.

Seat belts and child restraints

reduce the risk of serious or fatal

injuries for all occupants in the

event of a collision or sudden stop.

Without a seat belt, occupants

could be shifted too close to a

deploying air bag, strike the interior

structure or be thrown from the

vehicle. Properly worn seat belts

greatly reduce these hazards.

Always follow the precautions

about seat belts, air bags and occu-

pant seating contained in this man-

ual.

323

Safety features of your vehicle

C020301AUN-EA

Larger children

Children who are too large for child

restraint systems should always occupy

the rear seat and use the available

lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should

be fastened snug on the hips and as low

as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A

child's squirming could put the belt out of

position. Children are afforded the most

safety in the event of an accident when

they are restrained by a proper restraint

system in the rear seat. If a larger child

(over age 12) must be seated in the front

seat, the child should be securely

restrained by the available lap/shoulder

belt and the seat should be placed in the

rearmost position. Children age 12 and

under should be restrained securely in

the rear seat. NEVER place a child age

12 and under in the front seat. NEVER

place a rear facing child seat in the front

seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-

es the child’s neck or face, try placing the

child closer to the centre of the vehicle. If

the shoulder belt still touches their face

or neck they need to be returned to a

child restraint system.

C020302AUN

Pregnant women

The use of a seat belt is recommended for

pregnant women to lessen the chance of

injury in an accident. When a seat belt is

used, the lap belt portion should be placed

as low and snugly as possible on the hips,

not across the abdomen. For specific rec-

ommendations, consult a physician.

C020303AUN

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

When this is necessary, you should con-

sult a physician for recommendations.

C020304AUN

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should

never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

C020305AUN-EA

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event

of an accident and to achieve maximum

effectiveness of the restraint system, all pas-

sengers should be sitting up and the front

and rear seats should be in an upright posi-

tion when the car is moving. A seat belt can-

not provide proper protection if the person is

lying down in the rear seat or if the front and

rear seats are in a reclined position.

WARNING

- Shoulder belts

on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to be

in contact with a child’s neck or

face whilst the vehicle is in motion.

• If seat belts are not properly worn

and adjusted on children, there is

a risk of death or serious injury.

WARNING

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of serious or

fatal injuries in the event of a colli-

sion or sudden stop. The protection

of your restraint system (seat belts

and air bags) is greatly reduced by

reclining your seat. Seat belts must

be snug against your hips and

chest to work properly. The more

the seatback is reclined, the greater

the chance that an wearer's hips

will slide under the lap belt causing

serious internal injuries or the wear-

er's neck could strike the shoulder

belt. Drivers and passengers should

always sit well back in their seats,

properly belted, and with the seat-

backs upright.

Safety features of your vehicle

243

C020400AEN-EA

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disas-

sembled or modified. In addition, care

should be taken to assure that seat belts

and belt hardware are not damaged by

seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Maintenance of seat belts

When cleaning the seat belts, as recom-

mended, avoid getting solutions into the

buckle where they may attack the lubri-

cant or cause corrosion. Do not attempt

to bleach or re-dye belts, as this may

affect the webbing strength.

✽

NOTICE

Do not attempt any form of modifica-

tions or repairs to seat belt components.

If the retractor or other components do

not operate correctly, call an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer, who will take the

necessary corrective action. Your autho-

rised dealer will inspect all seat belt

components at regular intervals and

advise if replacement is required.

Between these inspections you should

make regular checks to ensure that for-

eign objects are not preventing complete

buckle engagement.

C020401AEN

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected peri-

odically for wear or damage of any kind.

Any damaged parts should be replaced

as soon as possible.

C020402AUN

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.

If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solution

and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong

detergents or abrasives should not be

used because they may damage and

weaken the fabric.

C020403AEN-EA

When to replace seat belts

If the vehicle has been involved in an

accident all seat belt in use at that time,

or belts where the pre-tensioner device

has been deployed must be replaced.

This should be done even if no damage

is visible. We recommend that you con-

sult an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

When you return the rear seat to its

seating position after the rear seat

has been folded, be careful not to

damage the seat belt webbing or

buckle. Be sure that the webbing or

buckle does not get caught or

pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt

with damaged webbing or buckle

could possibly fail during a colli-

sion or sudden stop, resulting in

serious injury. If the webbing or

buckles are damaged, get them

replaced immediately.

325

Safety features of your vehicle

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

C030000AEN

Children riding in the car should sit in the

rear seat and must always be properly

restrained to minimise the risk of injury in

an accident, sudden stop or sudden

manoeuvre. According to accident statis-

tics, children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in the

front seat. Larger children not in a child

restraint should use one of the seat belts

provided.

If the child is old enough to sit alone and

the car is not equipped with a proper

child or infant seat, the child should be

placed in the rear seat and restrained

with a lap/sash belt.

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child and/or

infant safety seats must be properly

placed and installed in the rear seat. You

must use a commercially available child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of the Safety Standards of your

country. Child restraint systems are

designed to be secured in vehicle seats by

lap belts or the lap belt portion of a

lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor

and/or ISOFIX anchors (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in a

crash if their restraints are not properly

secured. For small children and babies, a

child seat or infant seat must be used.

Before buying a particular child restraint

system, make sure it fits your car seat

and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow

all the instructions provided by the man-

ufacturer when installing the child

restraint system.

WARNING

• A child restraint system should

be placed in the vehicle's rear

seat since this can make an

important contribution to safety.

• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never

install a child or infant seat on the

front passenger's seat. Should an

accident occur and cause the

passenger-side air bag to deploy,

it could severely injure or kill an

infant or child seated in an infant

or child seat. Thus only use a

child restraint in the rear seat of

your vehicle.

(Continued)

• A seat belt or child restraint sys-

tem can become very hot if it is

left in a closed vehicle on a sunny

day, even if the outside tempera-

ture does not feel hot. Be sure to

check the seat cover and buckles

before placing a child there.

• When the child restraint system

is not in use, store it in the lug-

gage area or fasten it with a seat

belt so that it will not be thrown

forward in the case of a sudden

stop or an accident.

• Unrestrained children should not

be carried in the car. Holding a

child in your arms is not a satis-

factory substitute for a child

restraint system. A child held in

this manner can be crushed

between your body and the interi-

or of the car.

• Children may be seriously injured

or killed by an inflating air bag.

All children, even those too large

for child restraints, must ride in

the rear seat.

Safety features of your vehicle

263

WARNING

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front passen-

ger seat can be forcefully struck

by an inflating air bag resulting in

serious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the child restraint

system manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use of

the child restraint.

• Always make sure the child seat

is secured properly in the car and

your child is securely restrained

in the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms or

lap when riding in a vehicle. The

violent forces created during a

crash will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-

self and a child. During a crash,

the belt could press deep into the

child causing serious internal

injuries.

(Continued)

• Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle – not even for a short

time. The car can heat up very

quickly, resulting in serious

injuries to children inside. Even

very young children may inadver-

tently cause the vehicle to move,

entangle themselves in the win-

dows, or lock themselves or oth-

ers inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or any

two persons, to use the same

seat belt.

• Children often squirm and repo-

sition themselves improperly.

Never let a child ride with the

shoulder belt under their arm or

behind their back. Always proper-

ly position and secure children in

the rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up or

kneel on the seat or floor of a

moving vehicle. During a colli-

sion or sudden stop, the child

can be violently thrown against

the vehicle’s interior, resulting in

serious injury.

(Continued)

• Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that "hooks"

over a seatback, it may not pro-

vide adequate security in an acci-

dent.

• Seat belts can become very hot,

especially when the car is parked

in direct sunlight. Always check

seat belt buckles before fasten-

ing them over a child.

• After an accident, we recommend

that the system be checked by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

327

Safety features of your vehicle

C030100AEN-EA

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of

a child seat or infant seat is required. This

child seat or infant seat should be of

appropriate size for the child and should

be installed in accordance with the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

It is further required that the seat be

placed in the vehicle's rear seat. Your

vehicle is provided with child restraint

anchorage points for installing the child

seat or infant seat.

WARNING

- Child seat

installation

• A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the car and the child is not

properly restrained in the child

restraint. Before installing the

child restraint system, read the

instructions supplied by the child

restraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operate

as described in this section, we

recommend that the system be

checked by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual's

instructions regarding child

restraint systems and the

instructions provided with the

child restraint system could

increase the chance and/or

severity of injury in an accident.

• If the vehicle headrest prevents

proper installation of a child seat

(as described in the child seat

system manual), the headrest of

the respective seating position

shall be readjusted or entirely

removed.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger

seat, because of the danger that an

inflating passenger-side air bag

could impact the rear-facing child

restraint and kill the child.

CRS09

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Safety features of your vehicle

283

C030101ATQ-EA

Installing a child restraint system by

lap belt (if equipped)

To install a child restraint system on the

outboard or centre rear seats, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Place the child restraint system on the

rear seat.

2. Extend the latch plate tongue of the

lap belt.

3. Route the lap belt through the restraint

according to the seat manufacturer’s

instructions.

4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the lap

belt for a snug hold on the child

restraint by pulling on the loose end of

the belt. After installation of the child

restraint system, try to move it in all

directions to be sure the child restraint

system is securely installed.

C030102AUN-EA

Installing a child restraint system by

lap/shoulder belt (if equipped)

To install a child restraint system on the

outboard or centre rear seats, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder belt

around or through the restraint, follow-

ing the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-

bing is not twisted.

E2MS1030051GHA2260

329

Safety features of your vehicle

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into

the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”

sound.

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat

belt to take up any slack. After installa-

tion of the child restraint system, try to

move it in all directions to be sure the

child restraint system is securely

installed.

If you need to tighten the belt, pull more

webbing toward the retractor. When you

unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to

retract, the retractor will automatically

revert back to its normal seated passen-

ger emergency locking usage condition.

If the child seat moves, readjust the

length of the seat belt. In Australia/NZ the

child restraint manufacturer's instructions

must be followed when fitting the unit to

the vehicle.

C030101AUN-EA

Installing a child restraint system by

lap belt (on the centre rear seat) (if

equipped)

To install a child restraint system on the

centre rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system on the

centre rear seat.

2. Extend the latch plate tongue of the

lap belt.

3. Route the lap belt through the restraint

according to the seat manufacturer’s

instructions.

4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the lap

belt for a snug hold on the child

restraint by pulling on the loose end of

the belt. After installation of the child

restraint system, try to move it in all

directions to be sure the child restraint

system is securely installed.

OEN036101 OEN036104 1GHA2260

Safety features of your vehicle

303

C030103ATQ-EA

Securing a child restraint seat with

“Tether Anchor” system

(if equipped)

Child restraint hook holders are located

behind the rear seats.

1. Route the child restraint seat strap

over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrest,

route the tether strap under the head-

rest and between the headrest posts,

otherwise route the tether strap over

the top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

appropriate child restraint hook holder

and tighten to secure the seat.

2GHA3300L

WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one child

restraint to a single tether or to a

single lower anchorage point. The

increased load caused by multiple

seats may cause the tethers or

anchorage points to break, causing

serious injury or death.

WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the car and the child is not prop-

erly restrained in the child restraint.

Always follow the child seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

OTQ037039L

331

Safety features of your vehicle

C030104BTQ-EA

Securing a child restraint system

with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether

Anchorage” system (if equipped)

ISOFIX is a standardised method of fit-

ting child seats that eliminates the need

to use the standard adult seat belt to

secure the seat in the vehicle. This

enables a much more secure and posi-

tive location with the added benefit of

easier and quicker installation.

An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it

has vehicle-specific approval in accor-

dance with the requirements of relevant

regulation.

There are ISOFIX marks located on the

lower portion of each side of the rear

seatbacks. These marks indicate the

position of the lower anchors for child

restraints so equipped.

WARNING

- Child restraint

check

Check that the child restraint sys-

tem is secure by pushing and

pulling it in different directions.

Incorrectly fitted child restraints

may swing, twist, tip or separate

causing death or serious injury.

WARNING

- Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for

adult seatbelts, harnesses, or for

attaching other items or equip-

ment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not work

properly if attached somewhere

other than the correct tether

anchor.

OTQ038161R OTQ037040L

Safety features of your vehicle

323

On each side of the rear seat, between

the cushion and backrest, are located a

pair of ISOFIX anchorage points togeth-

er with a top tether mounting behind the

rear seats. During the installation, the

seat has to be engaged at the anchor-

age-points in a way you can hear it click-

ing (check by pulling!) and has to be fixed

with the Top Tether-belt on the belonging

point behind rear seats.

The installing and the use of a child-seat

has to be done according to the

installing-manual, which is added to the

ISOFIX-seat.

To secure the child restraint seat

1. To engage the child restraint seat to

the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child

restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX

anchor. Listen for the audible “click”

sound.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

child restraint hook holder and tighten

to secure the seat. (Refer to the previ-

ous page.)

OUN036140L

WARNING

• When using the vehicle's

"ISOFIX" system to install a child

restraint system in the rear seat,

all unused vehicle rear seat belt

metal latch plates or tabs must be

latched securely in their seat belt

buckles and the seat belt web-

bing must be retracted behind

the child restraint to prevent the

child from reaching and taking

hold of unretracted seat belts.

Unlatched metal latch plates or

tabs may allow the child to reach

the unretracted seat belts which

may result in strangulation and a

serious injury or death to the

child in the child restraint.

• Do not place anything around the

lower anchors. Also make sure

that the seat belt is not caught in

the lower anchors.

WARNING

Install the child restraint seat fully

rearward against the seatback with

the seatback in a vertical position,

not reclined.

CAUTION

Do not allow the rear seat belt web-

bing to get scratched or pinched by

the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX

anchor during the installation.

333

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

• Do not install a child restraint

seat at the centre of the rear seat

using the vehicle's ISOFIX

anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are

only provided for the left and

right outboard rear seating posi-

tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX

anchors by attempting to attach a

child restraint seat in the middle

of the rear seat to the ISOFIX

anchors. In a crash, the child

restraint seat ISOFIX attachments

may not be strong enough to

secure the child restraint seat

properly in the centre of the rear

seat and may break, causing seri-

ous injury or death.

• Do not mount more than one

child restraint to a child restraint

lower anchorage point. The

improper increased load may

cause the anchorage points or

tether anchor to break, causing

serious injury or death.

(Continued)

• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-

patible child restraint seat only to

the appropriate locations shown

in the illustration.

• Always follow the installation and

use instructions provided by the

manufacturer of the child

restraint.

Safety features of your vehicle

343

C040000BTQ-EA

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag*

* : if equipped

AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ037023R

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

WARNING

• Even in vehicles with air bags,

you and your passengers must

always wear the safety belts pro-

vided in order to minimise the

risk and severity of injury in the

event of a collision or rollover.

• SRS and pretensioners contain

explosive chemicals.

If scraping a vehicle without

removing SRS and pretensioners

from a vehicle, it may cause fire.

Before scraping a vehicle, we rec-

ommend that you contact an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

• Keep the SRS parts and wirings

away from water or any liquid. If

the SRS components are inoper-

ative due to exposure to water or

liquids, it may cause fire or

severe injury.

335

Safety features of your vehicle

C040900ATQ

How does the air bag system

operate

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if

necessary) only when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON or START

position.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of

a serious frontal collision in order to

help protect the occupants from seri-

ous physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which the

air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate based upon the severity of a col-

lision and its direction. These two fac-

tors determine whether the sensors

produce an electronic deployment/

inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the densi-

ty and stiffness of the vehicles or

objects which your vehicle hits in the

collision. The determining factors are

not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will sim-

ply see the deflated air bags hanging

out of their storage compartments after

the collision.

• In order to help provide protection in a

severe collision, the air bags must

inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag

inflation is a consequence of the

extremely short time in which a collision

occurs and the need to inflate the air

bag between the occupant and the

vehicle structures before the occupant

impacts those structures. This speed of

inflation reduces the risk of serious or

life-threatening injuries in a severe col-

lision and is thus a necessary part of air

bag design.

However, air bag inflation can also

cause injuries which can include facial

abrasions, bruises and broken bones

because the inflation speed also caus-

es the air bags to expand with a great

deal of force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the steer-

ing wheel air bag can cause fatal

injuries, especially if the occupant

is positioned excessively close to

the steering wheel.

WARNING

• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying air

bags in a collision, the driver

should sit as far back from the

steering wheel air bag as possi-

ble (at least 250 mm (10 inches)

away). The front passengers

should always move their seats

as far back as possible and sit

back in their seat.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the

event of collision, and passen-

gers may be injured by the air bag

expansion force if they are not in

proper position.

• Air bag inflation may cause

injuries including facial or bodily

abrasions, injuries from broken

glasses or burns.

Safety features of your vehicle

363

C040902ATQ

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make a

loud noise and they leave smoke and

powder in the air inside of the vehicle.

This is normal and is a result of the igni-

tion of the air bag inflator. After the air

bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-

comfort in breathing due to the contact of

your chest with both the seat belt and the

air bag, as well as from breathing the

smoke and powder. Open your doors

and/or windows as soon as possible

after impact in order to reduce dis-

comfort and prevent prolonged expo-

sure to the smoke and powder.

Though the smoke and powder are non-

toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin

(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the

case, wash and rinse with cold water

immediately and consult a doctor if the

symptom persists.

C040903ATQ

Do not install a child restraint on the

front passenger’s seat.

Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in the front passenger’s seat. If the air

bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-

ing child restraint, causing serious or

fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child

restraints in the front passenger’s seat

either. If the front passenger air bag

inflates, it could cause serious or fatal

injuries to the child.

1JBH3051

WARNING

When the air bags deploy, the air

bag related parts in the steering

wheel and/or instrument panel are

very hot. To prevent injury, do not

touch the air bag storage area’s

internal components immediately

after an air bag has inflated.

337

Safety features of your vehicle

C041000AEN

Air bag warning light

The purpose of the air bag warning light

in your instrument panel is to alert you of

a potential problem with your air bag -

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON,

the warning light should illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on whilst the vehicle is

in motion.

WARNING

• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it!

• Never put a child restraint in the

front passenger’s seat. If the front

passenger air bag inflates, it can

cause serious or fatal injuries.

W7-147

R5LDA004

OYDESA2042

■ Type A

■ Type B

Safety features of your vehicle

383

C040100ATQ-EA

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following com-

ponents:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module*

3. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*

4. Air bag warning light

5. SRS control module (SRSCM)

6. Front impact sensors

*: if equipped

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components whilst the ignition

switch is ON to determine if a crash

impact is severe enough to require air

bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat

belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate for about

6 seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, after which the

SRS air bag warning light should go out.

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.

We recommend that the system be

inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on whilst the vehicle is

in motion.

The front air bag modules are located

both in the centre of the steering wheel

and in the front passenger's panel above

the glove box. When the SRSCM detects

a sufficiently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically deploy

the front air bags.

B240B01L-R

Driver’s front air bag (1)

OTQ038160R

339

Safety features of your vehicle

Upon deployment, tear seams moulded

directly into the pad covers will separate

under pressure from the expansion of the

air bags. Further opening of the covers

then allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination

with a properly worn seat belt, slows the

driver's or the passenger's forward

motion, reducing the risk of head and

chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling the

driver to maintain forward visibility and

the ability to steer or operate other con-

trols.

B240B02L-R B240B03L-R

Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)

WARNING

• Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, cassette

holder, sticker, etc.) on the front

passenger's panel above the

glove box in a vehicle with a pas-

senger's air bag. Such objects

may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of liq-

uid air freshener inside the vehi-

cle, do not place it near the

instrument cluster nor on the

instrument panel surface.

It may become a dangerous pro-

jectile and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

B240B05L-R

Passenger’s front air bag

Safety features of your vehicle

403

C040400BTQ-EA

Driver's and passenger's front air

bag (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System

and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver

and passenger seating positions. The

indications of the system's presence are

the letters "SRS AIR BAG" embossed on

the air bag pad cover in the steering

wheel and the passenger's side front

panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed

under the pad covers in the centre of the

steering wheel and the passenger's side

front panel above the glove box.

WARNING

• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a fine

dust released in the vehicle.

These conditions are normal and

are not hazardous - the air bags

are packed in this fine powder.

The dust generated during air

bag deployment may cause skin

or eye irritation as well as aggra-

vate asthma for some persons.

Always wash all exposed skin

areas thoroughly with lukewarm

water and a mild soap after an

accident in which the air bags

were deployed.

• The SRS can function only when

the ignition switch is in the ON

position. If the SRS air bag warn-

ing light does not illuminate, or

continuously remains on after

illuminating for about 6 seconds

when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position, or after the

engine is started, comes on

whilst driving, the SRS is not

working properly. If this occurs,

we recommend that the system

be inspected by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turn

the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the ignition

key. Never remove or replace the

air bag related fuse(s) when the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion. Failure to heed this warning

will cause the SRS air bag warn-

ing light to illuminate.

OTQ037024/H

Driver’s front air bag

341

Safety features of your vehicle

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt system alone in

case of a frontal impact of sufficient

severity.

(Continued)

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries and receive the maxi-

mum safety benefit from your

restraint system:

• Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat.

• ABC – Always Buckle Children in

the back seat. It is the safest

place for children of any age to

ride.

• Front air bags can injure occu-

pants improperly positioned in

the front seats.

• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,

whilst still maintaining control of

the vehicle.

• You and your passengers should

never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags. Improperly

positioned drivers and passen-

gers can be severely injured by

inflating air bags.

• Never lean against the door or

centre console – always sit in an

upright position.

(Continued)

WARNING

Always use seat belts and child

restraints – every trip, every time,

everyone! Air bags inflate with con-

siderable force and in the blink of

an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-

pants in proper position to obtain

maximum benefit from the air bag.

Even with air bags, improperly and

unbelted occupants can be severe-

ly injured when the air bag inflates.

Always follow the precautions

about seat belts, air bags and occu-

pant safety contained in this manu-

al.

(Continued)

OTQ037025/H

Passenger’s front air bag

Safety features of your vehicle

423

OTQ036087G/H

1TQA2088/H

1TQA2091

Rear impact

Side impact

Rollover

(Continued)

• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box,

because any such object could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to deploy.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental deployment of the air bags

or by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If the SRS air bag warning light

remains illuminated whilst the

vehicle is being driven, we rec-

ommend that the system be

inspected by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

• Air bags can only be used once -

we recommend that the system

be replaced by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

• The SRS is designed to deploy

the air bags only when the impact

is sufficiently severe and when

the impact is in the front or

frontal angle of the vehicle, and

will not deploy in side, rear or

rollover impacts. Additionally, the

air bags will only deploy once.

Thus, seat belts must be worn at

all times.

• Front air bags are not intended to

deploy in side-impact, rear-

impact or rollover crashes. In

addition, front air bags will not

deploy in frontal crashes below

the deployment threshold.

(Continued)

343

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• A child restraint system must

never be placed in the front seat.

The infant or child could be

severely injured or killed by an air

bag deployment in case of an

accident.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he or

she must be properly belted and

the seat should be moved as far

back as possible.

• For maximum safety protection in

all types of crashes, all occu-

pants including the driver should

always wear their seat belts

whether or not an air bag is also

provided at their seating position

to minimise the risk of severe

injury or death in the event of a

crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-

sarily close to the air bag whilst

the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can result in serious or fatal

injury in a crash. All occupants

should sit upright with the seat

back in an upright position, cen-

tred on the seat cushion with

their seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and their feet on

the floor until the vehicle is

parked and the ignition key is

removed.

• The SRS air bag system must

deploy very rapidly to provide

protection in a crash. If an occu-

pant is out of position because of

not wearing a seat belt, the air

bag may forcefully contact the

occupant causing serious or fatal

injuries.

Safety features of your vehicle

443

C040800BTQ-EA

Why didn’t my air bag go off in a

collision? (Inflation and non-infla-

tion conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents in

which the air bag would not be expect-

ed to provide additional protection.

These include rear impacts, second or

third collisions in multiple impact

accidents, as well as low speed

impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module

(2) Front impact sensor

OTQ037026R/OTQ037027R/OTQ037028

345

Safety features of your vehicle

C040801ATQ

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a

frontal collision depending on the intensi-

ty, speed or angles of impact of the front

collision.

1TQA2084/H

(Continued)

• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changed

due to the deformation of the

front bumper, body. We recom-

mend that the system be serviced

by an authorised HYUNDAI deal-

er.

• Your vehicle has been designed

to absorb impact and deploy the

air bag(s) in certain collisions.

Installing bumper guards or

replacing a bumper with non-gen-

uine parts may adversely affect

your vehicle’s collision and air

bag deployment performance.

WARNING

• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air

bag deployment, which could

result in serious personal injury

or death.

• If the installation location or

angle of the sensors is altered in

any way, the air bags may deploy

when they should not or they may

not deploy when they should,

causing severe injury or death.

Therefore, do not try to perform

maintenance on or around the air

bag sensors. Have the vehicle

checked and repaired by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

463

Although the front air bags (driver’s and

front passenger’s air bags) are designed

to inflate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of colli-

sions if the front impact sensors detect a

sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved roads,

the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully

on unimproved roads or on surfaces not

designed for vehicle traffic to prevent

unintended air bag deployment.

C040802ATQ

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags are

designed not to deploy in such cases

because they may not provide benefits

beyond the protection of the seat belts

in such collisions.

• Frontal air bags are not designed to

inflate in rear collisions, because occu-

pants are moved backward by the

force of the impact. In this case, inflat-

ed air bags would not be able to pro-

vide any additional benefit.

1TQA2086/H OTQ036087/H

347

Safety features of your vehicle

• Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move to the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

• In an angled collision, the force of

impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would not

be able to provide any additional bene-

fit, and thus the sensors may not

deploy any air bags.

• Just before impact, drivers often brake

heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the

front portion of the vehicle causing it to

“ride” under a vehicle with a higher

ground clearance. Air bags may not

inflate in this "under-ride" situation

because deceleration forces that are

detected by sensors may be signifi-

cantly reduced by such “under-ride”

collisions.

1TQA2089/H1TQA2088/H OTQ052215/H

Safety features of your vehicle

483

• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-

dents because air bag deployment

would not provide protection to the

occupants.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with objects such as utility

poles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated to one area and

the full force of the impact is not deliv-

ered to the sensors.

C041100ATQ-EA

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free

and so there are no parts you can safely

service by yourself. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not illuminate, or con-

tinuously remains on, we recommend

that the system be inspected by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as

removing, installing, repairing, or any

work on the steering wheel must be per-

formed by an authorised HYUNDAI deal-

er. Improper handling of the SRS system

may result in serious personal injury.

1TQA2091 1TQA2092/H

349

Safety features of your vehicle

C041300ATQ-EA

Additional safety precautions

• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-

down back seat. All occupants should

sit upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor.

• Passengers should not move out of

or change seats whilst the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not wear-

ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-

gency stop can be thrown against the

inside of the vehicle, against other

occupants, or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed to

restrain one occupant. If more than

one person uses the same seat belt,

they could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

• Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the seat

belt can reduce the protection provided

by the seat belt and increase the

chance of serious injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place hard

or sharp objects between them-

selves and the air bags. Carrying

hard or sharp objects on your lap or in

your mouth can result in injuries if an

air bag inflates.

WARNING

• Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the addition

of any kind of badges to the pad

covers or modifications to the

body structure, can adversely

affect SRS performance and lead

to possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-

ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or

one which has been moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely affect

the air bag covers and proper

deployment of the system.

• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box,

because any such object could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

• If the air bags inflate, we recom-

mend that the system be

replaced by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring, or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental inflation of the air bags or

by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If components of the air bag sys-

tem must be discarded, or if the

vehicle must be scrapped, certain

safety precautions must be

observed. An authorised

HYUNDAI dealer knows these

precautions and can give you the

necessary information. Failure to

follow these precautions and pro-

cedures could increase the risk

of personal injury.

• If your vehicle was flooded and

has soaked carpeting or water on

flooring, you shouldn't try to start

the engine; we recommend that

you contact an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

Safety features of your vehicle

503

• Keep occupants away from the air

bag covers. All occupants should sit

upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor. If occupants are too close to the

air bag covers, they could be injured if

the air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objects on or

near the air bag covers. Any object

attached to or placed on the front air

bag covers could interfere with the

proper operation of the air bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components.

• Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the operation

of the supplemental restraint system

sensing components and wiring har-

nesses.

• Never hold an infant or child on your

lap. The infant or child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in the event of a

crash. All infants and children should

be properly restrained in appropriate

child safety seats or seat belts in the

rear seat.

C041400AUN

Adding equipment to or modifying

your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

C041200AUN-EA

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels are attached to

alert driver and passengers of potential

risk of air bag system.

Note that these government warnings

focus on the risk to children, and bring to

your attention of the risks which adults

are exposed to. These warnings have

been described in previous pages.

WARNING

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to be

shifted too close to a deploying

air bag, strike the interior struc-

ture or be thrown from the vehicle

resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always sit upright with the seat-

back in an upright position, cen-

tred on the seat cushion with

your seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and your feet on

the floor.

OTQ037029

* : if equipped

Keys / 4-2

Remote keyless entry / 4-4

Theft-alarm system / 4-6

Door locks / 4-8

Tailgate / 4-13

Windows / 4-16

Bonnet / 4-21

Fuel filler lid / 4-23

Steering wheel / 4-26

Mirrors / 4-28

Instrument cluster / 4-32

Rear parking assist system / 4-44

Hazard warning flasher / 4-47

Lighting / 4-47

Wipers and washers / 4-52

Interior light / 4-55

Defroster / 4-57

Manual climate control system / 4-58

Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-69

Storage compartment / 4-71

Interior features / 4-73

Audio system / 4-78

Features of your vehicle

D010100AEN-EA

Record your key number

The key code number is

stamped or printed on

the bar code tag

attached to the key set.

Should you lose your

keys, we recommend that you contact an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer. Remove

the key code tag and store it in a safe

place. Also, record the code number and

keep it in a safe and handy place, but not

in the vehicle.

D010200BEN

Key operations

Used to start the engine, lock and unlock

the doors.

KEYS

WARNING

We recommend that you use parts

for replacement from an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer. If an aftermarket

key is used, the ignition switch may

not return to ON after START. If this

happens, the starter will continue

to operate causing damage to the

starter motor and possible fire due

to excessive current in the wiring.

WARNING - Ignition key

Leaving children unattended in a

vehicle with the ignition key is dan-

gerous even if the key is not in the

ignition switch is ACC or ON posi-

tion. Children copy adults and they

could place the key in the ignition.

The ignition key would enable chil-

dren to operate power windows or

other controls, or even make the

vehicle move, which could result in

serious bodily injury or even death.

Never leave the keys in your vehicle

with unsupervised children, when

the engine is running.

Features of your vehicle

D010300CEN-EA

Immobiliser system

Your vehicle may be equipped with an

electronic engine immobiliser system to

reduce the risk of unauthorised vehicle

use.

Your immobiliser system is comprised of

a small transponder in the ignition key

and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobiliser system, whenever

you insert your ignition key into the igni-

tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks

and determines and verifies if the ignition

key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, the

engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the

engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobiliser sys-

tem:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-

der and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobiliser system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

The immobiliser system activates auto-

matically. Without a valid ignition key for

your vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽

NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the

key with other immobiliser keys around.

Otherwise the engine may not start or

may stop soon after it starts. Keep each

key separate in order to avoid a starting

malfunction.

✽

NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your

keys, consult an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

CAUTION

The transponder in your ignition

key is an important part of the

immobiliser system. It is designed

to give years of trouble-free service,

however you should avoid expo-

sure to moisture, static electricity

and rough handling. Immobiliser

system malfunction could occur.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the

immobiliser system because it

could cause the immobiliser sys-

tem to malfunction and we recom-

mend that the system be serviced

by an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper

alterations, adjustments or modifi-

cations to the immobiliser system

are not covered by your vehicle

manufacturer warranty.

CAUTION

Do not put metal accessories near

the ignition switch.

The engine may not start for the

metal accessories may interrupt the

transponder signal from normally

transmitting.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

Remote keyless entry system

operations

D020101APA

Lock

All doors (and tailgate) are locked if the

lock/unlock button (1) is pressed when a

front door is unlocked.

If all doors (and tailgate) are closed, the

hazard warning lights blink once to indi-

cate that all doors (and tailgate) are

locked.

However, if any door (or tailgate) remains

open, the hazard warning lights will not

operate. If all doors (and tailgate) are

closed after the lock button is pressed,

the hazard warning lights blink.

D020102APA

Unlock

All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked if

the lock/unlock button (1) is pressed

when both front doors are locked.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice

again to indicate that all doors (and tail-

gate) are unlocked.

After depressing this button, the doors

(and tailgate) will be locked automatical-

ly unless you open any door within 30

seconds.

D020200CEN-EA

Transmitter precautions

✽

NOTICE

The transmitter will not work if any of

following occur:

• The ignition key is in ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).

• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or

an airport which can interfere with

normal operation of the transmitter.

(Continued)

When the transmitter does not work

correctly, open and close the door with

the ignition key. If you have a problem

with the transmitter, we recommend

that you contact an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the transmitter is in close proximity

to your cell phone or smart phone, the

signal from the transmitter could be

blocked by normal operation of your

cell phone or smart phone. This is

especially important when the phone

is active such as making call, receiving

calls, text messaging, and/or sending/

receiving emails. Avoid placing the

transmitter and your cell phone or

smart phone in the same pants or

jacket pocket and maintain adequate

distance between the two devices.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ047002

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from

water or any liquid. If the keyless

entry system is inoperative due to

exposure to water or liquids, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er vehicle warranty.

Features of your vehicle

D020300CTQ-EA

Battery replacement

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-

tery which will normally last for several

years. When replacement is necessary,

use the following procedure.

1. Remove the screw (1) using a cross-

tip screwdriver.

2. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-

tly pry open the transmitter centre

cover.

3. Remove the battery cover (2).

4. Replace the battery with a new one.

When replacing the battery, make sure

the battery position.

5. Install the battery in the reverse order

of removal.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. If the keyless entry

system is inoperative due to

changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er’s vehicle warranty.

OTQ047003G

CAUTION

• The keyless entry system trans-

mitter is designed to give you

years of trouble-free use, howev-

er it can malfunction if exposed to

moisture or static electricity. If

you are unsure how to use or

replace the battery, we recom-

mend that you contact an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can

cause the transmitter to malfunc-

tion. Be sure to use the correct

battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmit-

ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or

expose it to heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately disposed bat-

tery can be harmful to the envi-

ronment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to

your local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from

electromagnetic materials that

blocks electromagnetic waves to

the key surface.

Features of your vehicle

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

D030000AEN-EA

This system is designed to provide pro-

tection from unauthorised entry into the

car. This system is operated in three

stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the

second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and

the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-

gered, the system provides an audible

alarm with blinking of the hazard warning

lights.

D030100ATQ-EA

Armed stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm

the system as described below.

1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-

tion switch and exit the vehicle.

2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)

and engine bonnet are closed and

latched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of

the keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the

hazard warning lights will blink once to

indicate that the system is armed.

If any door (or tailgate) or engine bonnet

remains open, the hazard warning lights

will not blink and the theft-alarm will not

arm. If all doors (and tailgate) and engine

bonnet are closed after the lock button is

pressed, the hazard warning lights blink

once.

✽

NOTICE

The theft-alarm system by the key can

be activated by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer. We recommend that

you consult with your authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not arm the system until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

system is armed whilst a passen-

ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the

alarm may be activated when the

remaining passenger(s) leave the

vehicle. If any door (or tailgate) or

engine bonnet is opened within 30

seconds after the system enters the

armed stage, the system is disarmed

to prevent an unnecessary alarm.

Armed

stage

Theft-alarm

stage

Disarmed

stage

Features of your vehicle

D030200AEN-EA

Theft-alarm stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the

following occurs whilst the system is

armed.

• A front or rear door is opened without

using the transmitter.

• The tailgate is opened without using

the transmitter.

• The engine bonnet is opened.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning lights will blink continuously for

approximately 30 seconds. To turn off the

system, unlock the doors with the trans-

mitter.

D030400BTQ-EA

Disarmed stage

The system will be disarmed when the

doors (and tailgate) are unlocked with the

transmitter.

After depressing the unlock button, the

hazard warning lights will blink twice to

indicate that the system is disarmed.

After depressing the unlock button, if any

door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30

seconds, the system will be rearmed.

✽

NOTICE

• If the system is not disarmed with the

transmitter, insert the key into the

ignition switch and start the engine.

Then the system will be disarmed.

• If you lose your keys, we recommend

that you consult with your authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the

theft-alarm system because it could

cause the theft-alarm system to

malfunction and we recommend

that the system be serviced by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper

alterations, adjustments or modifi-

cations to the theft-alarm system

are not covered by your vehicle

manufacturer warranty.

Features of your vehicle

D050100CTQ

Operating door locks from out-

side the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to lock and toward the front of

the vehicle to unlock.

• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door with

a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock

automatically. (if equipped)

• If you lock the front passenger’s door

with a key all vehicle doors will lock

automatically. (if equipped)

• Doors can also be locked and

unlocked with the transmitter. (if

equipped)

• Once the doors are unlocked, they may

be opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the door

by hand. Make sure that doors are

closed securely.

✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operating

temporarily in order to protect the

circuit and prevent damage to system

components.

• Once the rear doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle and sliding the door towards

the rear of the vehicle.

• When the rear door is fully open, the

door will lock into an open position. To

close the door, pull out the door handle

and slide the door towards the front of

vehicle.

DOOR LOCKS

OTQ047005/H

Unock

Lock

OTQ047006/H

Rear sliding doors

WARNING

• If you do not close the door

securely, the door may open

again.

• Be careful that someone's body

and hands are not trapped when

closing the door.

Features of your vehicle

• To lock a door without the key, push the

inside door lock button (1) or central

door lock switch (2

)

to the “Lock” posi-

tion and close the door (3).

• If you lock the door with the central

door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors

will lock automatically. (if equipped)

✽

NOTICE

Always remove the ignition key, engage

the parking brake, close all windows

and lock all doors when leaving your

vehicle unattended.

WARNING

When the rear sliding door is not

fully open, it is not latched and may

move unintentionally. This could

result in a serious injury.

CAUTION

The left sliding door cannot be

opened when the fuel filler lid is

open. However, if the fuel filler lid is

opened after the door is opened

slightly, the left sliding door can be

slide rearward. Close the left sliding

door to prevent possible damage to

the door or the fuel filler lid.

OTQ047007R

Front door

OTQ047008

Rear sliding door

Features of your vehicle

104

Operating door locks from inside

the vehicle

D050201ATQ-EA

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The

red mark (2) on button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-

ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door

is locked properly, the red mark (2) on

the door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle

(3) outward.

• Front doors may be opened with the

lock button is in the locked position by

pulling on the inner door handle (if

equipped with this feature).

• Front doors cannot be locked if the

ignition key is in the ignition switch with

either of the front doors open.

OTQ047009R

Front door

OTQ047010

Rear sliding door

WARNING

- Door lock mal-

function

If a power door lock ever fails to

function whilst you are in the vehi-

cle, try one or more of the following

techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and

manual) whilst simultaneously

pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and

handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the

key to unlock the door from out-

side.

• Move to the cargo area and open

the tailgate. (if equipped)

Unlock

Lock

411

Features of your vehicle

D050202ATQ

With central door lock switch

(if equipped)

Operate by depressing the central door

lock switch.

• When pushing down on the portion (1)

of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

• When pushing down on the portion (2)

of the switch, all vehicle doors will

unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch and

any front door is open, the doors will

not lock when the portion (1) of central

door lock switch is pressed.

OTQ047011R

WARNING

- Unlocked

vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can

invite theft or possible harm to you

or others from someone hiding in

your vehicle whilst you are gone.

Always remove the ignition key,

engage the parking brake, close all

windows and lock all doors when

leaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattended

children

An enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

severe injury to unattended chil-

dren or animals who cannot escape

the vehicle. Furthermore, children

might operate features of the vehi-

cle that could injure them, or they

could encounter other harm, possi-

bly from someone gaining entry to

the vehicle. Never leave children or

animals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING -

Doors

• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked whilst the

vehicle is in motion to prevent

accidental opening of the door.

Locked doors will also discour-

age potential intruders when the

vehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doors

and watch for vehicles, motorcy-

cles, bicycles or pedestrians

approaching the vehicle in the

path of the door. Opening a door

when something is approaching

can cause damage or injury.

Features of your vehicle

124

D050300AUN-EA

Impact sensing door unlock sys-

tem (if equipped)

All doors will automatically unlock when

an impact is acknowledged by the impact

sensors whilst the ignition is switch ON.

However, the doors may not be unlocked

if mechanical problems occur with the

door lock system or battery.

D050400AFD-EA

Speed sensing door lock system

(if equipped)

When the speed of the vehicle reaches

above 40 km/h for 1 second, it will auto-

matically lock all doors. For activation of

this feature, we recommend that you

contact an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

✽

NOTICE

An authorised HYUNDAI dealer can

select some auto door lock/unlock fea-

tures as follows;

• Speed sensing auto door locking

• Auto door unlock when the ignition

key is removed from the ignition

switch

If you want to select a door lock/unlock

feature, we recommend that you contact

an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

D050500ATQ

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to help

prevent children from accidentally open-

ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.

The rear door safety locks should be

used whenever children are in the vehi-

cle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock located on

the front edge of the door to the lock

( ) position. When the child safety

lock is in the lock position, the rear

door will not open even though the

inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside

door handle (1).

Even though the doors may be unlocked,

the rear door will not open by pulling the

inner door handle until the rear door child

safety lock is unlocked ( ).

WARNING - Rear door

locks

If children accidentally open the

rear doors whilst the vehicle is in

motion, they could fall out and be

severely injured or killed. To pre-

vent children from opening the rear

doors from the inside, the rear door

safety locks should be used when-

ever children are in the vehicle.

OTQ047012

413

Features of your vehicle

D070100ATQ

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked

when all doors are locked or unlocked

with the key, transmitter or central door

lock switch. (if equipped)

• The tailgate can also be locked and

unlocked with the key if the vehicle is

equipped with a key hole on the tail-

gate.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened

by pressing the handle switch and

pulling the handle up. (Type A)

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened

by pulling the handle. (Type B)

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock and

door mechanisms may not work proper-

ly due to freezing conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped with twin

swing type tailgates, you may fully open

(if equipped) as follows ;

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the pin from the bracket hole

and insert the pin into the pin hole.

3. Open the tailgate fully.

TAILGATE

WARNING

The tailgate swings upward. Make

sure no objects or people are near

the rear of the vehicle when open-

ing the tailgate.

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the tail-

gate before driving your vehicle.

Possible damage may occur to the

tailgate lift cylinders and attached

hardware if the tailgate is not

closed prior to driving.

OTQ047013

OTQ047013G

Type B

Type A

OTQ047212

Features of your vehicle

144

4. After use, before closing the tailgate,

pull out the pin from the pin hole.

5. Align the checker arm hole and the

tailgate bracket hole, and insert the pin

into the bracket hole.

6. Close the tailgate.

D070200AUN

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and push

down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that

the tailgate is securely latched.

WARNING - Exhaust

fumes

If you drive with the tailgate open,

you will draw dangerous exhaust

fumes into your vehicle which can

cause serious injury or death to

vehicle occupants.

If you must drive with the tailgate

open, keep the air vents and all win-

dows open so that additional out-

side air comes into the vehicle.

OTQ047213

CAUTION

Insert the pin into the bracket hole

before closing the tailgate. Or the

tailgate checker and/or vehicle

damage is possible and a danger-

ous situation may occur.

415

Features of your vehicle

D070300AEN

Emergency tailgate safety release

(if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-

gency tailgate safety release lever locat-

ed on the bottom of the tailgate.

When someone is inadvertently locked in

the luggage compartment, if the lever is

pushed, the tailgate latch mechanism is

released and the tailgate is opened by

pushing rearward.

WARNING

• For emergencies, be fully aware

of the location of the emergency

tailgate safety release lever in

this vehicle and how to open the

tailgate if you are accidentally

locked in the luggage compart-

ment.

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the luggage compartment

of the vehicle at any time. The

luggage compartment is a very

dangerous location in the event

of a crash.

• Use the release lever for emer-

gencies only. Use extreme cau-

tion, especially whilst the vehicle

is in motion.

WARNING

- Rear cargo

area

Occupants should never ride in the

rear cargo area where no restraints

are available. To avoid injury in the

event of an accident or sudden

stops, occupants should always be

properly restrained.

OTQ047015

OTQ047015G

Type B

Type A

Features of your vehicle

164

D080000ATQ

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch

(3) Window opening and closing

(4) Automatic power window down

(Driver’s window, if equipped)

(5) Rear seat window (Type A)

(6) Rear seat window (Type B)

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, power windows

may not work properly due to freezing

conditions.

WINDOWS

OTQ047016R

Type A Type B

417

Features of your vehicle

D080100AUN

Power windows (if equipped)

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for power windows to operate.

Each door has a power window switch

that controls the door's window. The driv-

er has a power window lock switch which

can block the operation of passenger

windows. The power windows can be

operated for approximately 30 seconds

after the ignition key is removed or turned

to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if

the front doors are opened, the power

windows cannot be operated within the

30 second period after the ignition key

removal.

✽

NOTICE

Whilst driving, if you notice buffeting

and pulsation (wind shock) with either

side window open, you should open the

opposite window slightly to reduce the

condition.

D080101ATQ

Type A

Window opening and closing

(if equipped)

The driver’s door has a master power

window switch that controls all the win-

dows in the vehicle.

To open or close a window, press down

or pull up the front portion of the corre-

sponding switch to the first detent posi-

tion (3).

D080102ATQ

Type B

Auto down window

(Driver’s window, if equipped)

Depressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent posi-

tion (4) completely lowers the driver’s

window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position whilst the window is in

operation, pull up the switch momentarily

to the opposite direction of the window

movement.

OTQ047203R OTQ047204R

Features of your vehicle

184

D080103ATQ

Type C

Auto up/down window

(Driver’s window, if equipped)

Depressing or pulling up the power win-

dow switch momentarily to the second

detent position (4) completely lowers or

lifts the window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position whilst the window is in

operation, pull up or depress and release

the switch to the opposite direction of the

movement.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do not

open or close two windows or

more at the same time. This will

also ensure the longevity of the

fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and

the individual door window

switch in opposing directions at

the same time. If this is done, the

window will stop and cannot be

opened or closed.

WARNING -

Windows

• NEVER leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised chil-

dren when the engine is running.

• NEVER leave any child unattend-

ed in the vehicle. Even very

young children may inadvertently

cause the vehicle to move, entan-

gle themselves in the windows,

or otherwise injure themselves or

others.

• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head and

other obstructions are safely out

of the way before closing a win-

dow.

• Do not allow children to play with

the power windows. Serious

injury can result from uninten-

tional window operation by the

child.

• Do not extend face or arms out-

side through the window opening

whilst driving.

OTQ047204R-1

419

Features of your vehicle

If the power window is not operated cor-

rectly, the automatic power window sys-

tem must be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Close driver’s window and continue

pulling up on driver’s power window

switch for at least 1 second after the

window is completely closed.

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the window is

blocked by an object or part of the body,

the window will detect the resistance and

will stop upward movement. The window

will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8

in.) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

whilst the power window switch is pulled

up continuously, the window will stop

upward movement then lower approxi-

mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power

window switch is pulled up continuously

again within 5 seconds after the window

is lowered by the automatic window

reversal feature, the automatic window

reversal will not operate.

✽

NOTICE

The automatic reverse feature for the

driver’s window is only active when the

“auto up” feature is used by fully

pulling up the switch. The automatic

reverse feature will not operate if the

window is raised using the halfway posi-

tion on the power window switch.

D080200AFD

Manual windows (if equipped)

To raise or lower the window, turn the

window regulator handle clockwise or

counterclockwise.

WARNING

When opening or closing the win-

dows, make sure your passenger's

arms, hands and body are safely

out of the way.

3FDA2015

WARNING

Always check for obstructions

before raising any window to avoid

injuries or vehicle damage. If an

object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in

diameter is caught between the

window glass and the upper win-

dow channel, the automatic reverse

window may not detect the resist-

ance and will not stop and reverse

direction.

Features of your vehicle

204

D080200ATQ

Rear seat window

(Type A, if equipped)

To open the window, move the window

whilst pressing the handle the direction

of the arrow.

Rear seat window

(Type B, if equipped)

To open the windows, pull the rear por-

tion of the latch out. Swing the latch for-

ward and out, then lock it into the open

position by pushing outward until you

hear a click. To close the windows, pull

the handle inward. Then push the handle

rearward until you hear a click.

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, rear quarter

panel windows may not work properly

due to freezing conditions.

OTQ047017 OTQ047018

421

Features of your vehicle

D090100BUN-EA

Opening the bonnet

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

bonnet. The bonnet should pop open

slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the

bonnet slightly, pull the secondary

latch (1) inside of the bonnet centre

and lift the bonnet (2).

3.Pull the support rod from the bonnet.

4.Hold the bonnet open with the support

rod.

BONNET

OTQ047019R

OTQ047020 OTQ047021

WARNING - Hot parts

Grasp the support rod in the area

wrapped in rubber. The rubber will

help prevent you from being burned

by hot metal when the engine is

hot.

WARNING

Open the bonnet after turning off

the engine on a flat surface, shift-

ing the shift lever to the P (Park)

position for automatic transmis-

sion and to the 1st (First) gear or R

(Reverse) for manual transmission,

and setting the parking brake.

Features of your vehicle

224

D090200AUN-EA

Closing the bonnet

1. Before closing the bonnet, check the

following:

• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed

from the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to

prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the bonnet until it is about 30

cm (1 ft.) above the closed position

and let it drop. Make sure that it locks

into place.

WARNING -

Bonnet

• Before closing the bonnet,

ensure that all obstructions are

removed from the bonnet open-

ing. Closing the bonnet with an

obstruction present in the bonnet

opening may result in property

damage or severe personal

injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or any

other combustible material in the

engine compartment. Doing so

may cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING

• Always double check to be sure

that the bonnet is firmly latched

before driving away. If it is not

latched, the bonnet could fly

open whilst the vehicle is being

driven, causing a total loss of vis-

ibility, which might result in an

accident.

• The support rod must be inserted

completely into the hole provided

in the bonnet whenever you

inspect the engine compartment.

This will prevent the bonnet from

falling and possibly injuring you.

• Do not move the vehicle with the

bonnet in the raised position, as

vision is obstructed and the bon-

net could fall or be damaged.

423

Features of your vehicle

D100100AUN

Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened from

inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel

filler lid opener button located on the dri-

ver’s door.

✽

NOTICE

If the fuel filler lid will not open because

ice has formed around it, tap lightly or

push on the lid to break the ice and

release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If

necessary, spray around the lid with an

approved de-icer fluid (do not use radi-

ator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a

warm place and allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel

filler lid opener button.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully

open.

4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank

cap (2) counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

D100101ATQ

FUEL FILLER LID

OTQ047022R

OTQ041023C

CAUTION

The left sliding door cannot be

opened when the fuel filler lid is

open. However, if the fuel filler lid is

opened after the door is opened

slightly, the left sliding door can be

slide rearward. Close the left sliding

door to prevent possible damage to

the door or the fuel filler lid.

Features of your vehicle

244

D100200AEN

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is

securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-

ly and make sure that it is securely

closed.

D100300AEN-EA

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuelling

since you can generate static

electricity by touching, rubbing

or sliding against any item or fab-

ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)

capable of producing static elec-

tricity. Static electricity discharge

can ignite fuel vapours resulting

in rapid burning. If you must re-

enter the vehicle, you should

once again eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching a metal part

of the vehicle, away from the fuel

filler neck, nozzle or other petrol

source.

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure to

place the container on the

ground prior to refuelling. Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel vapours

causing a fire. Once refuelling

has begun, contact with the vehi-

cle should be maintained until

the filling is complete.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refuelling

dangers

Automotive fuels are flammable

materials. When refuelling, please

note the following guidelines care-

fully. Failure to follow these guide-

lines may result in severe personal

injury, severe burns or death by fire

or explosion.

• Read and follow all warning at the

petrol station facility.

• Before refuelling note the loca-

tion of the Emergency Fuel Shut-

Off, if available, at the petrol sta-

tion facility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,

you should eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching another metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other petrol

source.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refuelling

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skin

and thus subject you to the risk

of fire and burns. Always remove

the fuel cap carefully and slowly.

If the cap is venting fuel or if you

hear a hissing sound, wait until

the condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refuelling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

425

Features of your vehicle

D100500AUN

Emergency fuel filer lid release

If the fuel filler lid does not open using

the remote fuel filler lid release, you can

open it manually. Unsnap and remove the

panel in the cargo area. Pull the handle

outward slightly.

CAUTION

• Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel require-

ments" suggested in section 1.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, please make sure

that you use parts designed for

replacement in your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can result

in a serious malfunction of the

fuel system or emission control

system. For more detailed infor-

mation, we recommend that you

contact an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted surfaces

may damage the paint.

• After refuelling, make sure the

fuel cap is installed securely to

prevent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

CAUTION

Do not pull the handle excessively,

otherwise the luggage area trim or

release handle may be damaged.

OTQ047024G

(Continued)

Use only approved portable plas-

tic fuel containers designed to

carry and store petrol.

• Do not use mobile phones whilst

refuelling. Electric current and/or

electronic interference from

mobile phones can potentially

ignite fuel vapours causing a fire.

• When refuelling, always shut the

engine off. Sparks produced by

electrical components related to

the engine can ignite fuel

vapours causing a fire. Once

refuelling is complete, check to

make sure the filler cap and filler

door are securely closed, before

starting the engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighter

and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit

cigarette in your vehicle whilst at

a petrol station especially during

refuelling. Automotive fuel is

highly flammable and can, when

ignited, result in fire.

• If a fire breaks out during refu-

elling, leave the vicinity of the

vehicle, and immediately contact

the manager of the petrol station

and then contact the local fire

department. Follow any safety

instructions they provide.

Features of your vehicle

264

D130100AEN-EA

Power steering

Power steering uses energy from the

engine to assist you in steering the vehi-

cle. If the engine is off or if the power

steering system becomes inoperative,

the vehicle may still be steered, but it will

require increased steering effort.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, we recommend that

the system be checked by authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

✽

NOTICE

If the power steering drive belt breaks

or if the power steering pump malfunc-

tions, the steering effort will greatly

increase.

✽

NOTICE

If the vehicle is parked for extended

periods outside in cold weather (below -

10°C/14°F), the power steering may

require increased effort when the engine

is first started. This is caused by

increased fluid viscosity due to the cold

weather and does not indicate a mal-

function.

When this happens, increase the engine

RPM by depressing accelerator until the

RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or

let the engine idle for two or three min-

utes to warm up the fluid.

D130300AUN

Tilt steering (if equipped)

Tilt steering allows you to adjust the

steering wheel before you drive. You can

also raise it to give your legs more room

when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned

so that it is comfortable for you to drive,

whilst permitting you to see the instru-

ment panel warning lights and gauges.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION

Never hold the steering wheel

against a stop (extreme right or left

turn) for more than 5 seconds with

the engine running. Holding the

steering wheel for more than 5 sec-

onds in either position may cause

damage to the power steering

pump.

WARNING

• Never adjust the angle of the

steering wheel whilst driving. You

may lose steering control and

cause severe personal injury,

death or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steering

wheel both up and down to be

certain it is locked in position.

427

Features of your vehicle

To change the steering wheel angle, pull

down the lock-release lever (1), adjust

the steering wheel to the desired angle

(2), then pull up the lock-release lever to

lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure

to adjust the steering wheel to the

desired position before driving.

D130500AUN

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn sym-

bol on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it

operates properly.

✽

NOTICE

To sound the horn, press the area indi-

cated by the horn symbol on your steer-

ing wheel (see illustration). The horn

will operate only when this area is

pressed.

OTQ047035R

CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do

not press on the horn with a sharp-

pointed object.

OTQ047036

Features of your vehicle

284

D140100BUN-EA

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror to centre on

the view through the rear window. Make

this adjustment before you start driving.

D140101AUN

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you start

driving and whilst the day/night lever is in

the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-

cles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview

clarity in the night position.

D140102AUN

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatical-

ly controls the glare from the headlights

of the car behind you in nighttime or low

light driving conditions. The sensor

mounted in the mirror senses the light

level around the vehicle, and automati-

cally controls the headlight glare from

vehicles behind you.

When the engine is running, the glare is

automatically controlled by the sensor

mounted in the rearview mirror.

Whenever the shift lever is shifted into

reverse (R), the mirror will automatically

go to the brightest setting in order to

improve the drivers view behind the vehi-

cle.

MIRRORS

WARNING - Rear visibility

Do not place objects in the rear

seat or cargo area which would

interfere with your vision through

the rear window.

OTQ047037G

CAUTION

When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner. Do

not spray glass cleaner directly on

the mirror as that may cause the liq-

uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-

ing.

Day

Night

WARNING

Do not modify the inside mirror and

do not install a wide mirror. It could

result in injury, during an accident

or deployment of the air bag.

429

Features of your vehicle

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn

the automatic dimming function on.

The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

Press the ON/OFF button to turn the

automatic dimming function off. The

mirror indicator light will turn off.

• The mirror defaults to the ON position

whenever the ignition switch is turned

on.

D140200AUN

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before

driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-

hand and right-hand outside rearview

mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted

remotely with the remote switch. (if

equipped) The mirror heads can be fold-

ed back to prevent damage during an

automatic car wash or when passing in a

narrow street.

OTQ027002G OTQ047038G/H

Indicator Sensor

WARNING -

Rearview mir-

rors

• The right outside rearview mirror

is convex. In some countries, the

left outside rearview mirror is

also convex. Objects seen in the

mirror are closer than they

appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirror

or direct observation to deter-

mine the actual distance of fol-

lowing vehicles when changing

lanes.

Features of your vehicle

304

D140201AEN-EA

Remote control (if equipped)

The electric remote control mirror switch

allows you to adjust the position of the

left and right outside rearview mirrors. To

adjust the position of either mirror, push

the switch (1) to R or L to select the right

side mirror or the left side mirror, then

press a corresponding point on the mirror

adjustment control to position the select-

ed mirror up, down, left or right.

After adjustment, put the switch into neu-

tral (centre) position to prevent the inad-

vertent adjustment.

OTQ047042R

CAUTION

Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the surface

of the glass. If ice should restrict

movement of the mirror, do not

force the mirror for adjustment. To

remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a

sponge or soft cloth with very warm

water.

CAUTION

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do

not adjust the mirror by force. Use

an approved spray de-icer (not radi-

ator antifreeze) to release the

frozen mechanism or move the

vehicle to a warm place and allow

the ice to melt.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors whilst the vehicle

is moving. This could result in loss

of control, and an accident which

could cause death, serious injury

or property damage.

CAUTION

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate whilst the switch is

depressed. Do not depress the

switch longer than necessary, the

motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-

side rearview mirror by hand.

Doing so may damage the parts.

431

Features of your vehicle

D140202ATQ

Folding the outside rearview mirror

Manual Type

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp

the housing of the mirror and then fold it

toward the rear of the vehicle.

Electric Type (if equipped)

To fold the outside rearview mirror,

depress the button.

To unfold it, depress the button again.

OEN046215/H OTQ049043R

CAUTION

• To prevent unnecessary battery

discharge, do not adjust the mir-

rors longer than necessary whilst

the engine is not running.

• In case of the electric type of out-

side rearview mirror, don’t fold it

by hand. It could cause the failure

of the motor.

Features of your vehicle

324

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer*

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine temperature gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Shift position indicator*

(Automatic transmission only)

7. Odometer/Tripmeter

8. Fuel gauge

* : if equipped

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.

OTQ047044R/OTQ041044G

D150000ATQ

Type A

Type B

433

Features of your vehicle

Instrument cluster control

D150100AEN-EE

Instrument panel illumination

(if equipped)

When the vehicle’s parking lights or

headlights are on, rotate the illumination

control knob to adjust the instrument

panel illumination intensity.

Gauges

D150201AUN

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the forward

speed of the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in miles

per hour and/or kilometers per hour.

D150202AUN

Tachometer (if equipped)

The tachometer indicates the approxi-

mate number of engine revolutions per

minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct

shift points and to prevent lugging and/or

over-revving the engine.

When the door is open, or if the engine is

not started within 1 minute, the tachome-

ter pointer may move slightly in ON posi-

tion with the engine OFF. This movement

is normal and will not affect the accuracy

of the tachometer once the engine is run-

ning.

OTQ047046R

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine within

the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine dam-

age.

WARNING

Never adjust the instrument cluster

whilst driving. This could result in

loss of control and lead to an acci-

dent that may cause death, serious

injury, or property damage.

Features of your vehicle

344

D150203AUN

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the

engine coolant when the ignition switch

is ON.

Do not continue driving with an overheat-

ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer

to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.

D150204BUN

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel

tank.

The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-

tion 9.

The fuel gauge is supplemented by

a low fuel warning light, which will illumi-

nate when the fuel tank is near empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel

warning light may come on earlier than

usual due to the movement of fuel in the

tank.

D150205AUN

Odometer/Tripmeter (if equipped)

Odometer (km or mi)

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to

determine when periodic maintenance

should be performed.

✽

NOTICE

It is forbidden that alteration of the

odometer of any vehicle with the intent

to change the mileage registered on the

odometer. The alteration may void your

warranty coverage.

OTQ047048

WARNING - Fuel gauge

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addition-

al fuel as soon as possible after the

warning light comes on or when the

gauge indicator comes close to the

“E” or “0” level.

CAUTION

Avoid driving with a very low fuel

level. If you run out of fuel, it could

cause the engine to misfire and

result in excessive loading of the

catalytic converter.

CAUTION

If the gauge pointer moves beyond

the normal range area toward the

“H” or “130” position, it indicates

overheating that may damage the

engine.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. The engine

coolant is under pressure and

could cause severe burns. Wait

until the engine is cool before

adding coolant to the reservoir.

435

Features of your vehicle

Tripmeter (km or mi)

TRIP A: Tripmeter A

TRIP B: Tripmeter B

The tripmeter indicates the distance of

individual trips selected by the driver.

Tripmeter A or B can be selected by

pressing the TRIP button for less than 1

second.

Tripmeter A or B can be reset to 0.0 by

pressing the TRIP button for 1 second or

more, and then releasing.

D150206ATQ-EA

Trip computer (if equipped)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-

controlled driver information system that

displays information related to driving,

including distance to empty, tripmeter

and average speed on the display when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

All stored driving information (except

odometer) is reset if the battery is dis-

connected. The odometer is always dis-

played until the display is turned off.

OTQ047047R OTQ047047ROTQ047049

Features of your vehicle

364

Push the TRIP button for less than 1 sec-

ond to select distance to empty, average

speed or tripmeter function as follows :

Distance to empty (km or miles)

This mode indicates the estimated dis-

tance to empty based on the current fuel

in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel

delivered to the engine. When the

remaining distance is below 50 km (30

miles), “---” will be displayed and the dis-

tance to empty indicator will blink.

The meter’s working range is from 50 to

999 km (30 to 999 miles).

✽

NOTICE

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-

ed, the “Distance to empty” function

may not operate correctly.

The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 6 litres (1.6

gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-

cle.

• The fuel consumption and distance to

empty values may vary significantly

based on driving conditions, driving

habits, and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-

mate of the available driving distance.

This value may differ from the actual

driving distance available.

OTQ047052

Odometer

Average speed

Tripmeter

Distance to empty

437

Features of your vehicle

Average speed (km/h or mph)

This mode calculates the average speed

of the vehicle since the last average

speed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

average speed keeps going whilst the

engine is running.

The meter's working range is from 0 to

220 km/h (0 to 140 mph).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1

second, when the average speed is

being displayed, clears the average

speed to zero (---).

Tripmeter (km or miles)

This mode indicates the distance of indi-

vidual trip since the last tripmeter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to

999.9 km (miles).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1

second when the tripmeter is being dis-

played clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

D150300AEN-EA

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). Any light that does not illuminate

should be checked by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

After starting the engine, check to make

sure that all warning lights are off. If any

are still on, this indicates a situation that

needs attention. When releasing the

parking brake, the brake system warning

light should go off. The fuel warning light

will stay on if the fuel level is low.

D150302AEN-EA

Air bag warning light

(if equipped)

This warning light will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds each time you

turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

This light also comes on when the

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is

not working properly.

When there is a malfunction with the

SRS. In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

OTQ047051

Tripmeter

Odometer

OTQ047054

Average speed

Odometer

Features of your vehicle

384

D150303AEN-EA

Anti-lock brake system

(ABS) warning light

(if equipped)

This light illuminates if the ignition switch

is turned ON and goes off in approxi-

mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-

ing normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on,

comes on whilst driving, or does not

come on when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, this indicates

that there may be a malfunction with the

ABS.

We recommend that you have the vehicle

inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer. The normal braking system will

still be operational, but without the assis-

tance of the anti-lock brake system.

Electronic brake force distri-

bution (EBD) system warning

light

If two warning lights illumi-

nate at the same time whilst

driving, your vehicle may

have a malfunction with the

ABS and EBD system.

In this case, your ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally. Have the

vehicle checked by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

D150304AEN-EA

Seat belt warning

Seat belt warning light (if equipped)

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt

warning light will blink for approximately

6 seconds each time you turn the ignition

switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after

the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt

warning light blinks again for approxi-

mately 6 seconds.

Seat belt warning chime (if equipped)

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened

when the ignition switch is turned ON or

if it is unfastened after the ignition switch

is ON, the seat belt warning chime will

sound for approximately 6 seconds.

Once the seat belt has been refastened

the chime will no longer sound.

WARNING

If the both ABS and brake warning

lights are on and stay on, your vehi-

cle’s brake system will not work

normally during sudden braking. In

this case, avoid high speed driving

and abrupt braking. Have your vehi-

cle checked by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

439

Features of your vehicle

D150305AUN

Turn signal indicator

The blinking green arrows on the instru-

ment panel show the direction indicated

by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on

but does not blink, blinks more rapidly

than normal, or does not illuminate at all,

a malfunction in the turn signal system is

indicated. Your dealer should be consult-

ed for repairs.

D150306AUN

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

lights are on and in the high beam posi-

tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

D150307AEN-EA

Engine oil pressure

warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oil

pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates whilst driv-

ing:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.

2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil as

required.

If the warning light remains on after

adding oil or if oil is not available, we rec-

ommend that you have the vehicle

inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

If the engine is not stopped imme-

diately after the engine oil pressure

warning light is illuminated, severe

damage could result.

CAUTION

If the oil pressure warning light

stays on whilst the engine is run-

ning, serious engine damage may

result. The oil pressure warning

light comes on whenever there is

insufficient oil pressure. In normal

operation, it should come on when

the ignition switch is turned on,

then go out when the engine is

started. If the oil pressure warning

light stays on whilst the engine is

running, there is a serious malfunc-

tion.

If this happens, stop the car as

soon as it is safe to do so, turn off

the engine and check the oil level. If

the oil level is low, fill the engine oil

to the proper level and start the

engine again. If the light stays on

with the engine running, turn the

engine off immediately. In any

instance where the oil light stays on

when the engine is running, the

engine should be checked by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer before

the car is driven again.

Features of your vehicle

404

D150308AEN-EA

Parking brake & brake fluid

warning light

Parking brake warning

This light is illuminated when the parking

brake is applied with the ignition switch in

the START or ON position. The warning

light should go off when the parking

brake is released whilst engine is run-

ning.

The parking brake warning chime will

sound to remind you that the parking

brake is applied when you are driving

above 10 km/h (6 mph). Always release

the parking brake before you drive.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may

indicate that the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required. Then check all brake

components for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are

found, the warning light remains on or

the brakes do not operate properly.

Have the vehicle towed to any autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys-

tem inspection and necessary repairs.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-

nal braking systems. This means you still

have braking on two wheels even if one

of the dual systems should fail. With only

one of the dual systems working, more

than normal pedal travel and greater

pedal pressure are required to stop the

car. Also, the car will not stop in as short

a distance with only a portion of the

brake system working. If the brakes fail

whilst you are driving, shift to a lower

gear for additional engine braking and

stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

To check bulb operation, check whether

the parking brake and brake fluid warning

light illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

Low brake vacuum pressure warning

(diesel engine only, if equipped)

If the warning light remains on, it may

indicate that the brake vacuum pump

requires attention. Therefore you should

avoid high speed driving or sudden stop,

and you should depress the brake pedal

deeper and harder than usual in braking.

Make sure to have the brake system

checked and repaired by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Driving the vehicle with a warning

light on is dangerous. If the brake

warning light remains on, have the

brakes checked and repaired imme-

diately by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

WARNING

• Continuous braking whilst driv-

ing on steep or long downhill

may cause to descend the vacu-

um level in brake booster for a

time and turn on the warning

light. In this case, shift down the

transmission. If the warning light

illuminate continuously, stop the

vehicle in the safe location and

wait until the warning light goes

off.

• Driving the vehicle with a warn-

ing light on is dangerous. If the

brake warning light remains on,

have the brakes checked and

repaired immediately by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

441

Features of your vehicle

D150312AUN

Shift pattern indicator

(if equipped)

The indicator displays to show the auto-

matic transmission shift lever selection.

D150339ASA

O/D OFF Indicator

(if equipped)

This indicator comes on when the O/D

system is deactivated.

D150313AEN-EA

Charging system warning

light

This warning light indicates a malfunction

of either the generator or electrical

charging system.

If the warning light comes on whilst the

vehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.

2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-

age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-

lem exists somewhere in the electrical

charging system. Have an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem

as soon as possible.

D150315AUN

Tailgate open warning light

This warning light blinks when the tail-

gate is not closed securely with the igni-

tion in any position.

D150316AUN

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when a

door is not closed securely with the igni-

tion in any position.

D150317AFD-EA

Immobiliser indicator

This light illuminates when the immobilis-

er key is inserted and turned to the ON

position to start the engine.

At this time, you can start the engine. The

light goes out after the engine is running.

When there is a malfunction with the

immobiliser system.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

D150318ATQ

Low fuel level warning light

This warning light indicates the fuel tank

is nearly empty. When it comes on, you

should add fuel as soon as possible.

Driving with the fuel level warning light on

or with the fuel level below “E” or “0” can

cause the engine to misfire and damage

the catalytic converter.

D150320AFD-EA

Malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) (check engine light)

(if equipped)

This indicator light is part of the Engine

Control System which monitors various

emission control system components. If

this light illuminates whilst driving, it indi-

cates that a potential problem has been

detected somewhere in the emission

control system. This light will also illumi-

nate when the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position, and will go out in a few

seconds after the engine is started. If it

illuminates whilst driving, or does not illu-

minate when the ignition key is turned to

the ON position, take your vehicle to your

nearest authorised HYUNDAI dealer and

have the system checked.

CHECK

O/D

OFF

Features of your vehicle

424

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be

drivable, but have the system checked by

an authorised HYUNDAI dealer promptly.

ESC*/ESC OFF indicator

(if equipped)

ESC indicator

The ESC indicator will illuminate when

the ignition switch is turned ON, but

should go off after approximately 3 sec-

onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors

the driving conditions and under normal

driving conditions, the ESC indicator will

remain off. When a slippery or low trac-

tion condition is encountered, the ESC

will operate, and the ESC indicator will

blink to indicate the ESC is operating.

But, if the ESC system malfunctions the

indicator illuminates and stays on. Take

your vehicle to an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer and have the system checked.

✽

NOTICE

After reconnecting or recharging a dis-

charged battery, the ESC indicator may

illuminate. In this case, turn the steering

wheel half way to the left and right

whilst the ignition switch is in the ON

position. Then, restart the engine after

the ignition is off. If the ESC indicator

does not turn off, have the system

checked by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION -

Diesel engine

If the Emission Control System

Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,

some error related to the injection

quantity adjustment occurs which

could result in loss of engine

power, combustion noise and poor

emission. Have the Engine Control

System inspected as soon as pos-

sible by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

CAUTION - Diesel engine

(if equipped with DPF)

When the malfunction indicator

light is blinks, it may stop blinking

after driving the vehicle at more

than 60km/h (37 mph) or at more

than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000

engine rpm for a certain time (for

about 25 minutes). If the malfunc-

tion indicator light continues to be

blinked in spite of the procedure,

please visit an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer and then check the DPF sys-

tem. If you continue to drive with

the malfunction indicator light

blinking for a long time, the DPF

system can be damaged and fuel

consumption can be worsen.

CAUTION

Prolonged driving with the

Emission Control System

Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-

nated may cause damage to the

emission control systems which

could effect drivability and/or fuel

economy.

CAUTION -

Petrol engine

If the Emission Control System

Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-

nates, potential catalytic converter

damage is possible which could

result in loss of engine power. Have

the Engine Control System inspect-

ed as soon as possible by an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

443

Features of your vehicle

ESC OFF indicator

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned ON,

but should go off after approximately 3

seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,

press the ESC OFF button. The ESC

OFF indicator will illuminate indicating

the ESC is deactivated.

* : Some countries use the term ESP

(Electronic stability program) instead

of ESC. Please refer to the term your

country use.

D150328AEN-EA

Glow indicator (Diesel

engine)

The indicator light illuminates when the

ignition switch is placed at the ON posi-

tion. The engine can be started after the

preheat indicator light goes off. The illu-

minating time varies with the water tem-

perature, air temperature and battery

condition.

✽

NOTICE

If the engine was not started within 10

seconds after the preheating is complet-

ed, turn the ignition switch once more to

the LOCK position during 10 seconds,

and then to the ON position, in order to

preheat again.

D150329AEN-EA

Fuel filter warning light

(Diesel engine)

This warning light illuminates for 3 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is set to the

ON position and then it will go out. If it

lights up whilst the engine is running, it

indicates that water has accumulated

inside the fuel filter. If this happens,

remove the water from the fuel filter. For

more information, refer to “Fuel filter” in

section 7.

CAUTION

If the indicator light remains on or

blinks after the engine has warmed

up or whilst driving, there may a

malfunction with the engine pre-

heating system. In this case, we

recommend that you have the vehi-

cle inspected by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

When the fuel filter warning light is

illuminated, engine power (vehicle

speed & idle speed) may decrease.

If you keep driving with the warning

light on, you can damage your vehi-

cle's engine parts and injection sys-

tem of the Common Rail. If this

occurs, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

Features of your vehicle

444

D150330AEN-EA

Overspeed warning

system (if equipped)

If you drive your vehicle at speeds of 120

km/h and above, the overspeed warning

light will blink accompanied with a chime

that will sound for approximately 5 sec-

onds. This system is to warn you that are

travelling faster than the maximum

national speed limit.

D150327AUN

Key reminder warning chime

(if equipped)

If the driver’s door is opened whilst the

ignition key is left in the ignition switch

(ACC or LOCK position), the key

reminder warning chime will sound. This

is to prevent you from locking your keys

in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the

key is removed from the ignition switch or

the driver’s door is closed.

D170000AEN-EA

The rear parking assist system assists

the driver when reversing by chiming if

an object is sensed within a distance of

120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle. This

system is a supplemental system and it

is not intended to nor does it replace the

need for extreme care and attention of

the driver. The sensing range and objects

detectable by the back sensors are limit-

ed. Whenever reversing, pay as much

attention to what is behind you as you

would in a vehicle without a rear parking

assist system.

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ047055

Sensors

120

km/h

WARNING

The rear parking assist system is a

supplementary function only. The

operation of the rear parking assist

system can be affected by several

factors (including environmental

conditions). It is the responsibility

of the driver to always check the

area behind the vehicle before and

whilst backing up.

445

Features of your vehicle

Operation of the rear parking

assist system

D170101AEN

Operating condition

• This system will activate when backing

up with the ignition switch ON.

If the vehicle is moving at a speed over

5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not be

activated correctly.

• The sensing distance whilst the rear

parking assist system is in operation is

approximately 120 cm (47 in.).

• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the closest

one will be recognized first.

D170102AUN

Types of warning sound

• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47

in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper:

Buzzer beeps intermittently.

• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31

in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper:

Buzzer beeps more frequently.

• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)

of the rear bumper:

Buzzer sounds continuously.

D170200AEN

Non-operational conditions of

rear parking assist system

The rear parking assist system may

not operate properly when:

1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will

operate normally when the moisture

has been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreign

matter, such as snow or water, or the

sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate

normally when the material is removed

or the sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces

(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-

ent).

4. Objects generating excessive noise

(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle

engines, or truck air brakes) are within

range of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.

6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones

are within range of the sensor.

7. The sensor is covered with snow.

8. Trailer towing

The detecting range may decrease

when:

1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-

ter such as snow or water. (The sens-

ing range will return to normal when

removed.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremely

hot or cold.

The following objects may not be rec-

ognized by the sensor:

1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,

chains or small poles.

2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-

sor frequency such as clothes, spongy

material or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m

(40 in.) in height and narrower than 14

cm (6 in.) in diameter.

Features of your vehicle

464

D170300AEN

Rear parking assist system pre-

cautions

• The rear parking assist system may

not sound sequentially depending on

the speed and shapes of the objects

detected.

• The rear parking assist system may

malfunction if the vehicle bumper

height or sensor installation has been

modified or damaged. Any non-factory

installed equipment or accessories

may also interfere with the sensor per-

formance.

• The sensor may not recognize objects

less than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sen-

sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-

tance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or stained

with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor

may be inoperative until the stains are

removed using a soft cloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-

sor. Sensor damage could occur.

✽

NOTICE

This system can only sense objects with-

in the range and location of the sensors;

It can not detect objects in other areas

where sensors are not installed. Also,

small or slim objects, such as poles or

objects located between sensors may not

be detected by the sensors.

Always visually check behind the vehi-

cle when backing up.

Be sure to inform any drivers of the

vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the

system regarding the systems capabili-

ties and limitations.

D170400AEN-EA

Self-diagnosis

If you don’t hear an audible warning

sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-

tently when shifting the gear to the R

(Reverse) position, this may indicate a

malfunction in the rear parking assist sys-

tem. If this occurs, have your vehicle

checked by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

Pay close attention when the vehi-

cle is driven close to objects on the

road, particularly pedestrians, and

especially children. Be aware that

some objects may not be detected

by the sensors, due to the object’s

distance, size or material, all of

which can limit the effectiveness of

the sensor. Always perform a visu-

al inspection to make sure the vehi-

cle is clear of all obstructions

before moving the vehicle in any

direction.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not

cover any accidents or damage to

the vehicle or injuries to its occu-

pants due to a rear parking assist

system malfunction. Always drive

safely and cautiously.

447

Features of your vehicle

D180000AUN

The hazard warning flasher should be

used whenever you find it necessary to

stop the car in a hazardous location.

When you must make such an emer-

gency stop, always pull off the road as far

as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on

by pushing in the hazard switch. This

causes all turn signal lights to blink. The

hazard warning lights will operate even

though the key is not in the ignition

switch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off,

push the switch a second time.

D190100BUN-EA

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being accidental-

ly discharged. The system automatical-

ly turns off the parking lights when the

driver removes the ignition key and

opens the driver’s door.

• If required, to keep the parking lights

on when the ignition key is removed,

perform the following :

1) Open the driver’s door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on the

steering column.

D190400ATQ

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and a

Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the

end of the control lever to one of the fol-

lowing positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER LIGHTING

OTQ067001R

CAUTION

If the driver gets out of the vehicle

through other doors (except dri-

ver’s door), the battery saver func-

tion does not operate. Therefore, it

causes the battery to be dis-

charged. In this case, make sure to

turn off the lamp before getting out

of the vehicle.

OTQ049131R

Features of your vehicle

484

D190401AEN

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the parking

light position (1st position), the tail,

license and instrument panel lights are

ON.

D190402AEN

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the headlight

position (2nd position) the head, tail,

license and instrument panel lights are

ON.

✽

NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlights.

D190500BUN

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,

push the lever away from you. Pull it back

for low beams. The high beam indicator

will light when the headlight high beams

are switched on. To prevent the battery

from being discharged, do not leave the

lights on for a prolonged time whilst the

engine is not running.

OTQ049301R OTQ049302R OTQ049303R

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there

are other vehicles. Using high

beam could obstruct the other dri-

ver's vision.

449

Features of your vehicle

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

towards you. It will return to the normal

(low beam) position when released. The

headlight switch does not need to be on

to use this flashing feature.

D190600AUN

Turn signals and lane change sig-

nals

The ignition switch must be on for the

turn signals to function. To turn on the

turn signals, move the lever up or down

(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-

ment panel indicate which turn signal is

operating.

They will self-cancel after a turn is com-

pleted. If the indicator continues to flash

after a turn, manually return the lever to

the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn

signal lever slightly and hold it in position

(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-

tion when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the

turn signal bulbs may be burned out and

will require replacement.

✽

NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick

or slow, a bulb may be burned out or

have a poor electrical connection in the

circuit.

OTQ049304R OTQ049305R

Features of your vehicle

504

D190700AEN

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improved

visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,

rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn

on when fog light switch is pressed after

the parklight is turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, press the switch

again.

D190800AUN

Rear fog light (if equipped)

To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the

headlight switch to the headlight on posi-

tion and press the rear fog light switch

(light on switch will illuminate).

The rear fog lights turn on when the rear

fog switch is pressed after the front fog

switch is turned to ON and the headlight

switch to the parklight position. (if

equipped)

To turn the rear fog lights off, press the

rear fog light switch again or turn the

headlight switch to the OFF position.

D190900AUN

Daytime running light

(if equipped)

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make

it easier for others to see the front of your

vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-

ful in many different driving conditions,

and it is especially helpful after dawn and

before sunset.

The DRL system will make the head-

lights turn OFF when:

1. The parklight switch is ON.

2. Engine stops.

OTQ047056R

CAUTION

When in operation, the fog lights

consume large amounts of vehicle

electrical power. Only use the fog

lights when visibility is poor.

OTQ047132R

451

Features of your vehicle

Headlight levelling device

(if equipped)

D191001ATQ-EA

Manual type

To adjust the headlight beam level

according to the number of the passen-

gers and the loading weight in the lug-

gage area, turn the beam levelling

switch.

The higher the number of the switch

position, the lower the headlight beam

level. Always keep the headlight beam at

the proper levelling position, or head-

lights may dazzle other road users.

Listed below are the examples of proper

switch settings. For loading conditions

other than those listed below, adjust the

switch position so that the beam level

may be the nearest as the condition

obtained according to the list.

Loading condition

Driver only

Driver + Front passenger

+ 4th row passenger

Full passengers

(including driver)

Full passengers (including

driver) + Maximum per-

missible loading

Driver + Maximum per-

missible loading

Switch position

Wagon Van

OTQ047133R

Features of your vehicle

524

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes*

D : Rear wiper/washer control*

· – Spraying washer fluid

· ON – Continuous wipe

· OFF – Off

· – Wash with brief wipes

* : if equipped

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OTQ048900R/OTQ049902R/OTQ048909R/OTQ049909R

Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer

(if equipped)

Type B

Type A

Type B

Type A

453

Features of your vehicle

D200100CTQ-EA

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition

switch is turned ON.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push

the lever upward and release it

with the lever in the OFF position.

The wipers will operate continu-

ously if the lever is pushed

upward and held.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the

same wiping intervals. Use this

mode in a light rain or mist. To vary

the speed setting, turn the speed

control knob.

LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

✽

NOTICE

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windshield, defrost the

windshield for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windshield wipers to

ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or ice

before using the wiper and washer, it

may damage the wiper and washer sys-

tem.

✽

NOTICE

• When you operate the wipers, if your

vehicle has a problem in any part of

the wiper operation system, the wiper

may operate in the LO mode regard-

less of the wiper switch position. In

this case, have your vehicle checked

by an authorised HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

• When the ignition key is removed, the

wiper blade sometimes may move to

properly position slightly for reducing

the deterioration of the windshield

wipers.

D200200AUN-EA

Windshield washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently

toward you to spray washer fluid on the

windshield and to run the wipers 1-3

cycles.

Use this function when the windshield is

dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will con-

tinue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the

washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not

sufficient, you will need to add appropri-

ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid

to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the

front of the engine compartment on the

driver side.

CAUTION

To prevent possible damage to the

washer pump, do not operate the

washer when the fluid reservoir is

empty.

Features of your vehicle

544

B200300ATQ

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

(if equipped)

Turn the switch to desired position to

operate the rear wiper and washer.

- Wash with brief wipes

ON - Normal wiper operation

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

- Spraying washer fluid and wiping

✽

NOTICE

Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 15 seconds or when the

fluid reservoir is empty; this could dam-

age the system. Do not operate the wiper

when the window is dry; this can result

in scratching as well as premature wiper

blade wear. For the same reason, do not

operate the washer when the washer

fluid reservoir is empty.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do not

operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use petrol,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers

manually.

• To prevent possible damage to the

wipers and washer system, use

anti-freezing washer fluids in the

winter season or cold weather.

WARNING

Do not use the washer in freezing

temperatures without first warming

the windshield with the defrosters;

the washer solution could freeze on

contact with the windshield and

obscure your vision.

455

Features of your vehicle

D210000AEN

D210100ATQ

Map lamp (if equipped)

• : Push the switch to turn the

map lamp on or off. This light

produces a spot beam for con-

venient use as a map lamp at

night or as a personal lamp for

the driver and the front pas-

senger.

• DOOR : In the DOOR position, the light

comes on when any door is

opened regardless of the igni-

tion switch position. When

doors are unlocked by the

transmitter, the light comes on

for approximately 30 seconds

as long as any door is not

open. The light goes out grad-

ually after approximately 30

seconds if the door is closed.

However, if the ignition switch

is ON or all doors are locked,

the light will turn off immedi-

ately.

If a door is opened with the

ignition switch in the ACC or

LOCK position, the light stays

on for about 20 minutes.

However, if a door is opened

with the ignition switch in the

ON position, the light stays on

continuously.

• ROOM : In the ROOM position, the light

stays on at all times.

INTERIOR LIGHT

CAUTION

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the engine

is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

OTQ047060

OTQ047060G

Type B

Type A

Features of your vehicle

564

D210200ATQ-EA

Room lamp (Rear, if equipped)

• : Push the switch to turn the

rear room lamp on or off.

➀ : Push the switch to turn the

map lamp on or off. This light

produces a spot beam for

convenient use as a map

lamp at night or as a person-

al lamp for the rear passen-

ger.

➁ DOOR : In the DOOR position, the

light comes on when any

door is opened regardless of

the ignition switch position.

➂ ROOM : In the ROOM position, the

light stays on at all times.

OTQ047061

OTQ047201

Type C

OTQ047062

Type A

Type B

OTQ047206

CAUTION

Do not leave the switch in this posi-

tion for an extended period of time

when the vehicle is not running.

457

Features of your vehicle

DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED)

➃ MOOD : Push the switch to turn the

mood lamp on when the

room lamp is off. Once the

mood lamp is on, each time

you press the button the

colour of the light will change.

The mood lamp will turn off

when the button is pressed

again after the last colour or

when the mood lamp button

is pressed for approximately

4 seconds or when the

ROOM, DOOR or DIMMER

button is pressed.

➄ DIMMER : If you push this button

when the room lamp is illu-

minated, the brightness of

the room lamp will dim in

three stages.

D220000AUN

✽

NOTICE

If you want to defrost and defog the

front windshield, refer to “Windshield

defrosting and defogging” in this sec-

tion.

D220100AUN-EA

Rear window defroster (if equipped)

The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from the

rear window, whilst the engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,

press the rear window defroster button

located in the centre facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window

defroster button illuminates when the

defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on

the rear window, brush it off before oper-

ating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 20 minutes

or when the ignition switch is turned off.

To turn off the defroster, press the rear

window defroster button again.

OTQ047064

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the conduc-

tors bonded to the inside surface of

the rear window, never use sharp

instruments or window cleaners

containing abrasives to clean the

window.

Features of your vehicle

584

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ047066R/OTQ047067

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Air conditioning button*

3. Temperature control knob

4. Mode selection knob

5. Rear fan speed control knob/

Rear climate control selection knob*

6. Rear temperature control button*

7. Rear window defroster button

8. Air intake control button

9. Rear fan speed control knob*

10. Rear temperature control* and mode

selection knob

*: if equipped

D230000BTQ

■

Front climate control

■

Rear climate control (if equipped)

CAUTION

Operating the blower when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position

could cause the battery to dis-

charge. Operate the blower when

the engine is running.

459

Features of your vehicle

D230100ATQ

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system (if equipped)

on.

OTQ047069R

Features of your vehicle

604

D230101ATQ

Mode selection

The mode selection knob controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-

board outlets, or windshield.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Floor-Level (C, F, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windshield and side win-

dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, F, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windshield with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position. To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

OTQ047068 OTQ047071R

461

Features of your vehicle

D230102AUN

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows you

to control the temperature of the air flow-

ing from the ventilation system. To

change the air temperature in the pas-

senger compartment, turn the knob to

the right position for warm and hot air or

left position for cooler air.

D230103AUN

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside (fresh)

air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when the

recirculated air position is

selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button will not illuminate

when the outside (fresh) air

position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

OTQ047072 OTQ047073

Features of your vehicle

624

✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fog-

ging of the windshield and side windows

and the air within the passenger com-

partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air con-

ditioning with the recirculated air posi-

tion selected will result in excessively dry

air in the passenger compartment.

D230104AUN

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to

control the fan speed of the air flowing

from the ventilation system. To change

the fan speed, turn the knob to the right

for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the

0 position turns off the fan.

To turn off the blowers

To turn off the blowers, turn the fan

speed control knob to the "0" position.

WARNING

• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air

position may allow humidity to

increase inside the vehicle which

may fog the glass and obscure vis-

ibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the

air conditioning or heating system

on. It may cause serious harm or

death due to a drop in the oxygen

level and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air

position can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, and loss of vehicle

control. Set the air intake control to

the outside (fresh) air position as

much as possible whilst driving.

OTQ047074 OTQ044400

463

Features of your vehicle

D230105AUN

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-

tioning system on (indicator light will illu-

minate). Push the button again to turn the

air conditioning system off.

D230200ATQ

Rear heating and air conditioning

(if equipped)

The temperature, fan speed and mode of

the rear climate control system can be

controlled independently regardless of

the front climate control system opera-

tion.

Turn the rear climate control selection

knob to the “R” and set the rear tempera-

ture, fan speed and mode to the desired

position.

However, the front climate control system

should be operated together for rear air

conditioning;

1. Set the front fan speed to the desired

position.

2. Push the air conditioning button.

3. Set the rear temperature, fan speed

and mode to the desired position.

OTQ047075 OTQ047076

Features of your vehicle

644

Rear vents

The vent can be adjusted by rotating the

thumb wheel.

✽

NOTICE

If all the vents are closed, it may cause

some noise. Always open 2 vents or

more.

D230202ATQ

Rear temperature control

To change the air temperature in the rear

passenger compartment, turn the knob

to the right for warm and hot air or left for

cooler air.

The rear mode is selected automatically

by selecting the rear temperature control.

• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear side ceiling.

• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear side ceiling and

the lower vents on the floor.

• : Rear air blows from the lower

vents on the floor.

OTQ047077

OTQ047078

In the front seat

OTQ047079

In the rear seat

465

Features of your vehicle

D230203ATQ

Rear fan speed control

To change the fan speed, turn the knob

to the right for higher speed or left for

lower speed.

To turn off the fan, turn the knob to the 0

position.

System operation

D230501AUN

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

D230502AUN

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode

to the

or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from

entering the car through the ventilation

system, temporarily set the air intake

control to the recirculated air position.

Be sure to return the control to the

fresh air position when the irritation

has passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle. This will help keep the driver

alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is

drawn in through the grilles just ahead

of the windshield. Care should be

taken that these are not blocked by

leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to the

fresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-

tioning system, and adjust the temper-

ature control to desired temperature.

OTQ047095

In the front seat

OTQ047080

In the rear seat

Features of your vehicle

664

D230503BFD

Air conditioning (if equipped)

All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems

are filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum

comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set

the temperature control to the extreme

left position, then set the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

✽

NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gauge

closely whilst driving up hills or in

heavy traffic when outside tempera-

tures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blower

fan but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the temperature gauge indi-

cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid

weather air conditioning may create

water droplets inside the vehicle.

Since excessive water droplets may

cause damage to electrical equipment,

air conditioning should only be run

with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows for a short time to let the hot

air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the

windows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-

cle by operating the air conditioning

system.

• During air conditioning system opera-

tion, you may occasionally notice a

slight change in engine speed as the

air conditioning compressor cycles.

This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every

month only for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

467

Features of your vehicle

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-

ping (or even puddling) on the ground

under the passenger side of the vehi-

cle. This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position provides

maximum cooling, however, continual

operation in this mode may cause the

air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid air

intake. This is a normal system opera-

tion characteristics.

D230504ATQ-EA

Fuel-fired Heater (if equipped)

The low fuel consumption fuel-fired

heater supplies additional heat to the

interior compartment to assist with cabin

heating during engine warm-up.

The following 3 conditions should be met

at the same time for automatic operation

of the fuel-fired heater.

• Engine running.

• Ambient temperature is lower than 5°C.

• Coolant temperature is lower than

68°C.

A cleaning process of the fuel-fired

heater will be performed automatically

when the heater is not operated due to

increase of coolant temperature and igni-

tion off.

During cleaning process, supplied fuel in

the heater will be burnt completely and

any smoke will be expelled. It is a neces-

sary process for next operation and dura-

bility of the heater and takes about 1~3

minutes.

✽

NOTICE

• The following symptoms will occur

and it is normal.

- A white smoke may come out from

the fuel-fired heater exhaust pipe

during operation of the heater.

However, when an excessive black

smoke is discharged, the fuel-fired

heater should be inspected.

- A “buk-buk” noise from the heater is

a noise to form flame for combus-

tion.

- When the heater is operated at full

load, a “Wooing” noise occurs.

- When shutting off the engine during

heater operation, a “Wing” noise

occurs to perform the cleaning

process.

• When refuelling, stop operation of the

fuel-fired heater by shutting off the

engine.

Features of your vehicle

684

D230300AFD-EA

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windshield even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, we recommend that the climate

control air filter be replaced by an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the car is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty, rough roads,

more frequent climate control air fil-

ter inspections and changes are

required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, we recommend that the

system be checked by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

D230400AEN-EA

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, we recommend that the system be

inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

✽

NOTICE

It is important when servicing the air

conditioning system that the correct

type and amount of oil and refrigerant is

used. Otherwise, damage to the com-

pressor and abnormal system operation

may occur.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

WARNING

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service

may cause serious injury to the

person performing the service.

469

Features of your vehicle

D250000AEN-EA

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-

perature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whilst

defrosting or defogging, set the mode

to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice

from the windshield, rear window, out-

side rear view mirrors, and all side win-

dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the bonnet

and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve

heater and defroster efficiency and to

reduce the probability of fogging up the

inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

D250101ATQ

To defog inside windshield

1. Select any fan speed except “0” posi-

tion.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Select the or position.

4. If the position is selected, the out-

side (fresh) air and air conditioning will

be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)

air position are not selected automatical-

ly, press the corresponding button manu-

ally.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

OTQ047100

WARNING - Windshield

heating

Do not use the or position

during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The dif-

ference between the temperature of

the outside air and that of the wind-

shield could cause the outer sur-

face of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this

case, set the mode selection knob

or button to the position and

fan speed control knob or button to

the lower speed.

Features of your vehicle

704

D250102AFD

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.

3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-

tioning will be selected automatically.

D250300ATQ

Defogging logic (if equipped)

To reduce the possibility of fogging up

the inside of the windshield, the air intake

or air conditioning are controlled auto-

matically according to certain conditions

such as position. To cancel or return

the defogging logic, do the following.

D250301AUN

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Turn the mode selection knob to the

defrost position ( ).

3. Push the air intake control button at

least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator light in the air intake control

button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second

of interval. It indicates that the defogging

logic is canceled or returned to the pro-

grammed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-

connected, it resets to the defog logic

status.

OTQ047101 OTQ047104

471

Features of your vehicle

D270000AUN

These compartments can be used to

store small items required by the driver

or passengers.

D270200BUN

Glove box

To open the glove box, pull the handle

and the glove box will automatically

open. Close the glove box after use.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

- Flammable

materials

Do not store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other flamma-

ble/explosive materials in the vehi-

cle. These items may catch fire

and/or explode if the vehicle is

exposed to hot temperatures for

extended periods.

CAUTION

• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartment.

• Always keep the storage com-

partment covers closed whilst

driving. Do not attempt to place

so many items in the storage

compartment that the storage

compartment cover cannot close

securely.

OTQ047107/H

WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury in an

accident or sudden stop, always

keep the glove box door closed

whilst driving.

CAUTION

Do not keep food in the glove box

for a long time.

Features of your vehicle

724

D270300BUN

Sunglass holder (if equipped)

To open the sunglass holder, press the

cover and the holder will slowly open.

Place your sunglasses in the compart-

ment door with the lenses facing out.

Push to close.

D270400ATQ

Multi box (if equipped)

To open the cover, pull the handle down.

Close the cover after use.

OTQ047108 OTQ047109/H

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sun-

glasses inside the sunglass hold-

er. Such objects can be thrown

from the holder in the event of a

sudden stop or an accident, pos-

sibly injuring the passengers in

the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holder

whilst the vehicle is moving. The

rear view mirror of the vehicle

can be blocked by an open sun-

glass holder.

• Do not put the glasses forcibly

into a sunglass holder to prevent

breakage or deformation of

glasses. It may cause personal

injury if you try to open it forcibly

when the glasses are jammed in

holder.

473

Features of your vehicle

D280100BEN

Cigarette lighter

For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-

tion switch must be in the ACC position

or the ON position.

To open the cover, press the cover and it

will slowly open.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the

way into its socket. When the element

has heated, the lighter will pop out to the

“ready” position.

If it is necessary to replace the cigarette

lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI

replacement or its approved equivalent.

D280200BTQ

Ashtray

To open the cover, press the cover and it

will slowly open. To clean the ashtray, the

plastic receptacle should be removed by

lifting the plastic ash receptacle upward

and pulling it out.

INTERIOR FEATURES

CAUTION

Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter

should be used in the cigarette lighter

socket. The use of plug-in acces-

sories (shavers, hand-held vacuums,

and coffee pots, etc.) may damage the

socket or cause electrical failure.

WARNING

• Do not hold the lighter in after it is

already heated because it will over-

heat.

• If the lighter does not pop out with-

in 30 seconds, remove it to prevent

overheating.

• Do not insert foreign objects into

the socket of the cigarette lighter. It

may damage the cigarette lighter.

OTQ047110R

CAUTION

• We recommend that you use

parts for replacement from an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

• The use of plug-in accessories

(shavers, hand-held vacuums,

and coffee pots, for example) may

damage the socket or cause elec-

trical failure.

WARNING - Ashtray use

• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays

as waste receptacles.

• Putting lit cigarettes or matches

in an ashtray with other com-

bustible materials may cause a

fire.

OTQ047111R

Features of your vehicle

744

D280300BTQ-EA

Cup holder

Front

To open the cover, press the knob on the

cover and it will slowly open.

Place a cup or small beverage can after

pulling out the blade (1).

Centre seat/Rear (if equipped)

Cups or small beverage cans may be

placed in the cup holders.

WARNING

- Hot liquids

• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder whilst

the vehicle is in motion. If the hot

liquid spills, you burn yourself.

Such a burn to the driver could

lead to loss of control of the vehi-

cle.

• To reduce the risk of personal

injury in the event of sudden stop

or collision, do not place uncov-

ered or unsecured bottles, glass-

es, cans, etc., in the cup holder

whilst the vehicle is in motion.

OTQ047112R

OTQ047113

Front

Centre seat

OTQ047114

Rear

(if equipped)

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct

sun light and do not put them in a

vehicle that is heated up. It may

explode.

CAUTION

When putting the drinking water on

the front or the centre seat cup

holder, the liquid may flow into the

external input terminal (if equipped)

by sudden braking, so be sure to

close the lid of the drinking water.

475

Features of your vehicle

D280400BTQ

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull

it downward, unsnap it from the bracket

(1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror (if equipped), pull

down the visor and slide the mirror cover

(3).

Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward

(4, if equipped).

The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-

ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)

* : if equipped

D280500AEN

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to provide

power for mobile telephones or other

devices designed to operate with vehicle

electrical systems. The devices should

draw less than 10 amps with the engine

running.

OTQ047115R OTQ047116R

CAUTION - Vanity mirror

lamp (if equipped)

Close the vanity mirror cover

securely and return the sunvisor to

its original position after use. If the

vanity mirror is not closed securely,

the lamp will stay on and could

result in battery discharge and pos-

sible sunvisor damage.

WARNING

Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-

ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet

and do not touch with a wet hand.

You may get an electric shock.

WARNING

For your safety, do not obstruct your

vision when using the sunvisor.

Features of your vehicle

764

D280600AEN

Digital clock (if equipped)

Whenever the battery terminals or relat-

ed fuses are disconnected, you must

reset the time.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position, the clock buttons operate as

follows:

D280601AUN

Hour (1)

Pressing the H button with your finger, a

pencil or similar object will advance the

time displayed by one hour.

D280602AUN

Minute (2)

Pressing the M button with your finger, a

pencil or similar object will advance the

time displayed by one minute.

D280603AUN

Reset (3)

To clear away minutes, press the R but-

ton with your finger, a pencil or similar

object. Then the clock will be set precise-

ly on the hour.

For example, if the R button is pressed

whilst the time is between 9:01 and 9:29,

the display will be reset to 9:00.

9:01 ~ 9:29 display changed to 9:00

9:30 ~ 9:59 display changed to 10:00

D280604AEN

Display conversion (if equipped)

To change the 12 hour format to the 24

hour format, press the R button until the

display blinks.

For example, if the R button is pressed

whilst the time is 10:15 p.m., the display

will be changed to 22:15.

OTQ047119

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock whilst driv-

ing. You may lose your steering

control and cause an accident that

results in severe personal injury or

death.

CAUTION

• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove

the accessory plug after use.

Using the accessory plug for pro-

longed periods of time with the

engine off could cause the bat-

tery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 10A in elec-

tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet. These devices may

cause excessive audio static and

malfunctions in other electronic

systems or devices used in your

vehicle.

477

Features of your vehicle

D280800AEN

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

D280900BTQ

Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)

When using a floor mat on the front floor

carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor

mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps

the floor mat from sliding forward.

OTQ047122

CAUTION

Do not hang heavy clothes, since

those may damage the hook.

OXM049228

OCM039200N

Type A

Type C

Type B

WARNING

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floor mat to

the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehicle’s

floor mat anchor(s) before driving

the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to the

vehicle’s floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top of

one another (e.g. all-weather rub-

ber mat on top of a carpeted floor

mat). Only a single floor mat

should be installed in each posi-

tion.

IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver’s side

floor mat anchors that are

designed to securely hold the

floor mat in place. To avoid any

interference with pedal operation,

we recommend that the HYUNDAI

floor mats designed for use in

your vehicle be installed.

WARNING

Do not hang other objects except

clothes. In an accident it may cause

vehicle damage or personal injury.

Features of your vehicle

784

✽

NOTICE

• If you install an aftermarket HID

head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and

electronic device may malfunction.

• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,

cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner

and air freshener from contacting the

interior parts because they may cause

damage or discoloration.

Antenna

D300102BTQ-EA

Roof antenna (if equipped)

Your car uses a roof antenna to receive

both AM and FM broadcast signals. This

antenna is a removable type. To remove

the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To

install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

AUDIO SYSTEM

CAUTION

• Before entering a place with a low

height clearance or a car wash,

remove surely the antenna by

rotating it counterclockwise. If

not, the antenna may be dam-

aged.

• When reinstalling your antenna, it

is important that it is fully tight-

ened to prevent it coming adrift

whilst driving. However, it still

able to be removed by hand for

parking, loading the roof rack or

whenever needed.

• When cargo is loaded on the roof

rack, do not place the cargo near

the antenna pole to ensure proper

reception.

OHM048154L

479

Features of your vehicle

D300200ATQ

Steering wheel audio control

(if equipped)

The steering wheel audio remote control

button is installed to promote safe driv-

ing.

D300204AHM

VOLUME (VOL +/-) (1)

• Press the lever upward (+) to increase

the volume.

• Press the lever downward (-) to

decrease the volume.

D300203AHM

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

The SEEK/PRESET button has different

functions based on the system mode. For

the following functions the button should

be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select

button.

CD/USB/ iPod mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed

for less than 0.8 second, it will work as

follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION

buttons.

CD/USB/ iPod mode

It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN but-

ton.

D300202AEN

MODE (3)

Press the button to change audio source.

FM (1~2)

➟ AM ➟ CD ➟ USB/AUX (iPod)

➟ FM...

D300205AHM

MUTE (4)

Press the button to mute the sound.

Detailed information for audio control

buttons are described in the following

pages in this section.

OTQ047124

CAUTION

Do not operate audio remote con-

trol buttons simultaneously.

Features of your vehicle

804

D300600AHM-EE

AUX, USB and iPod port

(if equipped)

If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB

(universal serial bus) port or iPod port,

you can use an aux port to connect audio

devices and an USB port to plug in an

USB and also an iPod port to plug in an

iPod.

✽

NOTICE

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise may

occur during playback. If this happens,

use the power source of the portable

audio device.

❋ iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

D300800AEN-EA

How car audio works

AM(MW, LW) and FM radio signals are

broadcast from transmitter towers locat-

ed around your city. They are intercept-

ed by the radio antenna on your car. This

signal is then received by the radio and

sent to your car speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached

your vehicle, the precise engineering of

your audio system ensures the best pos-

sible quality reproduction. However, in

some cases the signal coming to your

vehicle may not be strong and clear. This

can be due to factors such as the dis-

tance from the radio station, closeness of

other strong radio stations or the pres-

ence of buildings, bridges or other large

obstructions in the area.

AM(MW, LW) broadcasts can be

received at greater distances than FM

broadcasts. This is because AM(MW,

LW) radio waves are transmitted at low

frequencies. These long, low frequency

radio waves can follow the curvature of

the earth rather than travelling straight

out into the atmosphere. In addition, they

curve around obstructions so that they

can provide better signal coverage.

JBM002

AM(MW, LW) reception

JBM001

FM reception

OTQ040211R

481

Features of your vehicle

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high

frequencies and do not bend to follow the

earth's surface. Because of this, FM

broadcasts generally begin to fade at

short distances from the station. Also,

FM signals are easily affected by build-

ings, mountains, or other obstructions.

These can result in certain listening con-

ditions which might lead you to believe a

problem exists with your radio. The fol-

lowing conditions are normal and do not

indicate radio trouble:

• Fading - As your car moves away from

the radio station, the signal will weaken

and sound will begin to fade. When this

occurs, we suggest that you select

another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the trans-

mitter and your radio can disturb the

signal causing static or fluttering nois-

es to occur. Reducing the treble level

may lessen this effect until the distur-

bance clears.

• Station Swapping - As a FM signal

weakens, another more powerful sig-

nal near the same frequency may

begin to play. This is because your

radio is designed to lock onto the clear-

est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-

er station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals

being received from several directions

can cause distortion or fluttering. This

can be caused by a direct and reflect-

ed signal from the same station, or by

signals from two stations with close

frequencies. If this occurs, select

another station until the condition has

passed.

JBM005JBM004JBM003

FM radio station

Features of your vehicle

824

Using a mobile phone or a two-way

radio

When a mobile phone is used inside the

vehicle, noise may be produced from the

audio equipment. This does not mean

that something is wrong with the audio

equipment. In such a case, use the

mobile phone at a place as far as possi-

ble from the audio equipment.

Care of disc (if equipped)

• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows for ventila-

tion before using your car audio.

• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA/

AAC/WAVE files without permission.

Use CDs that are created only by law-

ful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents such as

benzene and thinner, normal cleaners

and magnetic sprays made for ana-

logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-

ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by

the edges or the edges of the centre

hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece of

soft cloth before playback (wipe it from

the centre to the outside edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface or

attach pieces of sticky tape or paper

onto it.

• Make sure on undesirable matter other

than CDs are inserted into the CD

player (Do not insert more than one

CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use to

protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-

RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate

normally according to manufacturing

companies or making and recording

methods. In such circumstances, if you

still continue to use those CDs, they

may cause the malfunction of your car

audio system.

✽

NOTICE - Playing an

Incompatible Copy-Protected

Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do not

comply with the international audio CD

standards (Red Book), may not play on

your car audio. Please note that if you

try to play copy protected CDs and the

CD player does not perform correctly

the CDs maybe defective, not the CD

player.

CAUTION

When using a communication sys-

tem such a mobile phone or a radio

set inside the vehicle, a separate

external antenna must be fitted.

When a mobile phone or a radio set

is used with an internal antenna

alone, it may interfere with the vehi-

cle's electrical system and adverse-

ly affect safe operation of the vehi-

cle.

WARNING

Don't use a mobile phone when you

are driving. You should stop at a

safe place to use a mobile phone.

483

Features of your vehicle

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Select Button

3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

5. Best Station Memory (BSM) Button

6. PRESET Station Select Buttons

TQ420

STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M420) (IF EQUIPPED)

Features of your vehicle

844

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the

ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion. Press the knob to switch the power

on. The LCD shows the radio frequency

in the radio mode or the tape direction

indicator in the tape mode. To switch the

power off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the volume and counterclockwise to

reduce the volume.

AVC(Auto Volume Control) Feature

As the vehicle speed increases, outside

noise also increases.

To compensate for this, the audio unit

activates the AVC feature that increases

the audio units volume level automatical-

ly.

2. BAND Select Button

Pressing the button changes

the AM(MW, LW), FM1 and FM2 bands.

3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the frequency and counterclockwise to

reduce the frequency.

Mode Select Knob

Pressing the MODE knob changes the

BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and

BALANCE mode.

The mode selected is shown on the dis-

play.

After selecting the each mode, rotate the

mode select knob clockwise or counter-

clockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the BASS,

rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the MID-

DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER Control

Rotate the control knob clockwise to

emphasize the rear speaker sound (front

speaker sound will be attenuated). When

the control knob is turned counterclock-

wise, the front speaker sound will be

emphasized (rear speaker sound will be

attenuated).

✽

NOTICE

For the VAN type car, FADER control

feature is not supported(no rear speaker

equipped).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

the right speaker sound (left speaker

sound will be attenuated). When the con-

trol knob is turned counterclockwise, the

left speaker sound will be emphasized

(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

AM/FM

485

Features of your vehicle

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.

When the side is pressed, the unit

will automatically tune to the next higher

frequency and when the side is

pressed, it will automatically tune to the

next lower frequency.

5. Best Station Memory (BSM)

Button

When the BSM button is pressed, the six

channels from the highest field intensity

are selected next and stored in memory.

The stations selected are stored in the

sequence of frequency from the first pre-

set key.

6. PRESET STATION Select

Buttons

Six stations for AM(MW, LW), FM1 and

FM2 respectively can be preset in the

electronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM(MW, LW) and twelve FM stations

may be programmed into the memory of

the radio. Then, by simply pressing the

AM(MW, LW) / FM select button and/or

one of the six station select buttons, you

may recall any of these stations instantly.

To program the stations, follow these

steps:

• Press AM(MW, LW)/FM selector to set

the band for AM(MW, LW), FM1 and

FM2.

• Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access that

station.

• Press the station select button for more

than two seconds. A select button indi-

cator will show in the display indicating

which select button you have

depressed. The frequency display will

flash after it has been stored into the

memory. You should then release the

button, and proceed to program the

next desired station. A total of 24 sta-

tions can be programmed by selecting

one AM(MW, LW) and two FM station

per button.

• When completed, any preset station

may be recalled by selecting AM(MW,

LW), FM1 or FM2 band and the appro-

priate station button.

CAUTION

• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. The audio sys-

tem mechanism may be damaged

if you spill them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage

to the system mechanisms could

occur.

Features of your vehicle

864

1. Tape Program/AUX Button

2. Tape Eject Button

3. DOLBY Button

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

5. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS) Button

6. FF/REW Button

CASSETTE TAPE PLYER OPERATION (M420) (IF EQUIPPED)

TQ420

487

Features of your vehicle

1. TAPE PROGRAM/AUX Button

This allows you to play the reverse side

of the tape by merely pressing the pro-

gram button. The PLAY and an arrow will

appear in the display to show the tape

direction.

• If you press this button more than 0.8

second. you can change to AUX mode.

• AUX mode is available only when AUX

jack is plugged in and will change back

to the last mode if you pull it out.

2. TAPE EJECT Button

• When the button is pressed with a

cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.

• When the button is pressed during

FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tape

PLAY, you can reduce this considerably

by merely pressing the DOLBY button. If

you want to cancel the DOLBY feature,

press the button again.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

• To repeat the track you are currently

listening to, press the RPT button. To

cancel , press again.

• If you do not release RPT operation

when the track ends, it will automati-

cally be replayed.

This process will continue until you

push the button again.

5. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS)

Button

Press the button to find the starting point

of each song in a prerecorded music

tape. The quiet space between songs

(must have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be

identified by the AUTO MUSIC Search

button.

• Pressing the will play the begin-

ning of the next music segment.

• Pressing the will start replay at the

beginning of the music just listened to.

• To stop FF or REW action, press the

button again.

6. FF/REW Button

• Fast forward tape winding starts when

the FF button is pressed during PLAY

or REW mode.

• PLAY starts when the FF button is

pressed again during FF mode.

• Tape rewinding starts when the

REW button is pressed during PLAY or

FF mode.

• PLAY starts when the REW button

pressed again during REW mode.

✽

NOTICE

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise may

occur during playback. If this happens,

use the orignal power source of the

portable audio device(e.g., batteries).

CAUTION

• Do not insert anything like coins

into the player slot as damage to

the unit may occur.

• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. The playback

mechanism may be damaged if

you spill them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage

to the system mechanisms could

occur.

• When no device is connected to

the AUX cable, please pull out the

cable from the JACK on the car.

(AUX MODE is operational and

noise may heard in the AUX

MODE.)

Features of your vehicle

884

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Select Button

3. TUNE/AUDIO Control Knob

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

5. Best Station Memory (BSM) Button

6. EQ Button

7. PRESET Station Select Buttons

8. AUDIO Mode Select

TQ445MP3

STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M445MP3) (IF EQUIPPED)

489

Features of your vehicle

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the

ignition key is in the "ACC" or “ON” posi-

tion. Press the knob to switch the power

on. The LCD shows the radio frequency

in the radio mode, the tape direction indi-

cator in the tape mode or CD track in

either the CD mode or CD AUTO

CHANGER mode. To switch the power

off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the volume and counterclockwise to

reduce the volume.

AVC(Auto Volume Control) Feature

As the vehicle speed increases, outside

noise also increases.

To compensate for this, the audio unit

activates the AVC feature that increases

the audio units volume level automatical-

ly.

2. BAND Select Button

Pressing the FM/AM button changes the

AM(MW, LW), FM1 and FM2 bands. The

mode selected is shown on the display.

3. TUNE/AUDIO Control Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the frequency and counterclockwise to

reduce the frequency.

AUDIO Control Knob

Pressing the AUDIO Mode select button

changes the BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE,

FADER and BALANCE mode. The mode

selected is shown on the display.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the BASS,

rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the MID-

DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER Control

Rotate the control knob clockwise to

emphasize the rear speaker sound (front

speaker sound will be attenuated). When

the control knob is turned counterclock-

wise, the front speaker sound will be

emphasized (rear speaker sound will be

attenuated).

✽

NOTICE

For the VAN type car, FADER Control

feature is not supported(no rear speaker

equipped).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

the right speaker sound (left speaker

sound will be attenuated). When the con-

trol knob is turned counterclockwise, the

left speaker sound will be emphasized

(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.

When the side is pressed, the unit will

automatically tune to the next higher fre-

quency and when the side is pressed,

it will automatically tune to the next lower

frequency.

Features of your vehicle

904

5. Best Station Memory (BSM)

Button

When the BSM button is pressed, the six

channels from the highest field intensity

are selected next and stored in memory.

The stations selected are stored in the

sequence frequency from the first preset

key.

6. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-

SIC, POP, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODE

for the desired tone quality. Each press of

the button changes the display as fol-

lows;

7. PRESET STATION Select

Buttons

Six stations for AM(MW, LW), FM1 and

FM2 respectively can be preset in the

electronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM(MW, LW) and twelve FM stations

may be programmed into the memory of

the radio. Then, by simply pressing the

AM(MW, LW) / FM select button and/or

one of the six station select buttons, you

may recall any of these stations instantly.

To program the stations, follow these

steps:

• Press AM(MW, LW)/FM selector to set

the band for AM(MW, LW), FM1 and

FM2.

• Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access that

station.

• Press the station select button for more

than two seconds. A select button indi-

cator will show in the display indicating

which select button you have

depressed. The frequency display will

flash after it has been stored into the

memory. You should then release the

button, and proceed to program the

next desired station. A total of 24 sta-

tions can be programmed by selecting

one AM(MW, LW) and two FM station

per button.

• When completed, any preset station

may be recalled by selecting AM(MW,

LW), FM1 or FM2 band and the appro-

priate station button.

8. AUDIO Mode select Button

Pressing the AUDIO Mode select button

changes the BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE,

FADER and BALANCE mode. The mode

selected is shown on the display.

After selecting the each mode, rotate the

TUNE knob clockwise or counterclock-

wise.

CLASSIC➟POP➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟DEFEAT

CAUTION

• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. The audio sys-

tem mechanism may be damaged

if you spill them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage

to the system mechanisms could

occur.

491

Features of your vehicle

1. CD/AUX Select Button

2. CD EJECT Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

4. FF/REW Button

5. EQ (Equalizer) Button

6. CD SCAN Button

7. MARK (Bookmark) Button

8. RPT (Repeat) Button

9. RDM (Random) Button

10. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)

11. FLDR (Folder Search) Button

TQ445MP3

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445MP3) (IF EQUIPPED)

Features of your vehicle

924

1. CD/AUX Select Button

• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.

• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation.

• When a disc is in the CD deck, if you

press the CD button the CD player will

begin playing even if the radio player is

being used.

• The CD player can be used when the

ignition switch is in either the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

• Push the CD button to start CD play-

back without pushing Power ON-OFF

control knob. (Only when a CD is in the

deck.)

• If you press this button you can change

to AUX mode.

• AUX mode is available only when AUX

jack is plugged in and change back to

last mode if you pull it out.

2. CD EJECT Button

• When the EJECT button is pressed

with a CD loaded, the CD will eject.

• To eject all of the discs, press this but-

ton for one second or more.

✽

NOTICE

• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of any

discs, as it may cause a malfunction.

• The unit cannot play a CD-

R(Recordable CD) and CD-

RW(Rewritable CD) that is not final-

ized. Please refer to the manual of CD-

R/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/CD-RW

software for more information on

finalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,

some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be

played on this unit.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

• The desired track on the disc currently

being played can be selected using the

track number.

• Press button once to skip forward to

the beginning of the next track.

Press within a second after play-

back begins to quickly move backward

through a CD.

If you press after more than a sec-

ond, it will take you to the beginning of

the track you are now listening to.

4. FF/REW Button

If you want to fast forward or reverse

through the compact disc track, push and

hold the FF or REW button.

When you release the button, the com-

pact disc player will resume playing.

5. EQ (Equalizer) Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-

SIC, POP, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT

MODE for the desired tone quality. Each

press of the button changes the display

as follows;

6. CD SCAN Button

• Press the CD SCAN button to playback

the first 10 seconds of each track.

• Press the CD SCAN button again with-

in 10 sec. when you have reached the

desired track.

• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track in the selected folder, Press

the CD SCAN button within a second.

(MP3 CD only)

CLASSIC➟POP➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟DEFEAT

493

Features of your vehicle

7. MARK (Bookmark) Button

When the CD player unit is operating, the

desired track on the disc can be book-

marked by using the MARK button.

• Press the MARK button for more than

one second to bookmark the desired

track. "M" will be displayed on the LCD

and "MEMORY NO." will display for

approximately five seconds with a

beep sound. To play the bookmarked

tracks, press the MARK button within

one second and select the book-

marked track to play.

• To erase a bookmarked track, press

the MARK button for more than one

second. This will erase the bookmark

with a beep sound.

If you want to delete all tracks stored on

Mark Memory, press FILE SEARCH

knob in the Mark Play mode for more

than one second. You will hear a beep

sound and all tracks will be deleted from

Mark Memory with "MARK DELETE

ALL" displayed on the LCD.

✽

NOTICE

Tracks stored on Mark Memory will be

automatically erased after you eject CDs

that contain those tracks.

8. RPT (Repeat) Button

• To repeat the track you are currently

listening to, press the RPT button. To

cancel, press it again. If it is pressed

for more than one second, it will repeat

all tracks within the currently played

CD.

• To repeat the music within currently

played folder, press the RPT button for

more than one second. Then it will

repeat in sequential order within the

currently played folder. To cancel,

press it again. (MP3 CD only)

• If you do not release RPT operation

when the track ends, it will automati-

cally be replayed. This process will

continue until you push the button

again.

9. RDM (Random) Button

• To listen to the music in random order,

press the RDM Button with a beep

sound for more than one second. To

cancel, press it again.

• To listen to the music within the cur-

rently played folder in random order,

press the RDM Button within one sec-

ond.

To cancel, press it again within one

second. If it is pressed for more than

one second, it will be played in random

order within currently played CD (MP3

CD only).

10. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE

Select Knob)

• You can move through the track by

turning the FILE SEARCH knob clock-

wise or counterclockwise.

• After moving through the desired file,

press the FILE SEARCH knob to play-

back in the selected file.

• If you do not press the FILE SEARCH

knob within five seconds, the file

searching function will be released.

11. FLDR (FOLDER Search)

Button

• You can move through the folder by

pushing the FLDR button to up ( )

and down ( ).

• After moving the desired folder, press

the FILE SEARCH knob to play back in

the selected folder. If you do not press

the FILE SEARCH knob within 5 sec-

onds, the folder searching function will

be released. It is not operated in a sin-

gle folder.

Features of your vehicle

944

✽

NOTICE

• When using a portable audio device

connected to power outlet, noise may

occur during playback.

If this happens, use the original power

source of the portable audio device

(e.g., batteries).

• To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperature

within a normal range by using the

vehicle’s air conditioning or heating

system.

• When replacing the fuse, replace it

with a fuse having the correct capaci-

ty.

• All stored bookmarks are all erased

when the car battery is disconnected

or power to the vehicle is lost. If this

occurs, the bookmarks will have to be

reset.

• Do not add any oil to the rotating

parts. Keep magnets, screwdrivers

and other metallic objects away from

the tape mechanism and head.

CAUTION

• Do not insert warped or poor

quality discs into the CD player

as damage to the unit may occur.

• Do not insert anything like coins

into the player slot as damage to

the unit may occur.

• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. The playback

mechanism may be damaged if

you spill them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage

to the system mechanisms could

occur.

• Off-road or rough surface driving

may cause the compact disc to

skip. Do not use the compact disc

when driving in such conditions

as damage to the compact disc

face could occur.

• Do not attempt to grab or pull the

compact disc out whilst the disc

is being pulled into the audio unit

by the self-loading mechanism.

Damage to the audio unit and

compact disc could occur.

• This equipment is designed to be

used only in a 12 volt DC battery

system with negative ground.

• This unit is made of precision

parts. Do not attempt to disas-

semble or adjust any parts.

• When driving your vehicle, be

sure to keep the volume of the

unit set low enough to allow you

to hear sounds coming from the

outside.

• Do not expose this equipment

(including the speakers and tape)

to water or excessive moisture.

• Avoid using recorded compact

discs in your audio unit. Original

compact discs are recommended.

• The unit is not sure of playing CD-

RW (Rewritable).

• When using the EQ function, turn

off the EQ function of the device

on the AUX input.

• When no device is connected to

the AUX cable, please pull out the

cable from the JACK on the car.

(AUX MODE is operational and

noise may heard in the AUX

MODE.)

495

Features of your vehicle

TQ_PA710_RADIO / TQ_PA710R_RADIO

1. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume Control

Knob

2. FM Button

3. AM Button

4. SEEK Button

5. Preset Button

6. AST (AUTO STORE) Button

7. TUNE & Audio Control Button

8. TA Button

9. PTY (FLDR) Button

10. FM/AM Button

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (PA710, GENERAL MODEL)

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (PA710R, EUROPE MODEL)

Features of your vehicle

964

Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME

and AUDIO CONTROL

1. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume

Control Button

Turns on/off the set when the IGNITION

SWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button

is turned to the right, it increases the vol-

ume and left,decreases the volume.

• Press this button to turn the audio sys-

tem ON or OFF. (EUROPE MODEL

ONLY)

• Depending on the model if the ignition

switch is not on ACC or ON position.

The “Battery Discharge” warning

appears on LCD after 10 seconds of

power-up, and automatically turns off

after 1 hours of operation.

• Adjusts the volume of the car audio

system. Rotate clockwise to increase

the volume or counterclockwise to

decrease.

2. FM Button

Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1and

FM2 when the button is pressed each

time.

3. AM Button

Pressing the [AM] button selects the AM

band. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.

4. SEEK Button

• When the [SEEK ] button is

pressed, it increases the band fre-

quency to automatically select a chan-

nel. Stops at the previous frequency if

no channel is found.

• When the [TRACK ] button is press-

ed, it reduces the band frequency to

automatically select a channel. Stops

at the previous frequency if no channel

is found.

5. Preset Button

Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-

ond to play the channel saved in each

button. Push Preset button for 0.8 sec-

ond or longer to save current channel to

the respective button with a beep.

6. AST(AUTO STORE) Button

When the button is pressed, it automati-

cally selects and saves channels with

high reception rate to PRESET buttons

[1]~[6] and plays the channel saved in

PRESET1. If no channel is saved after

AST, it will play the previous channel.

7. TUNE & Audio Control Button

Manual Channel Selection knob

Turn this control whilst listening to a radio

channel to manually adjust frequency.

Turn clockwise to increase frequency

and counterclockwise to reduce frequen-

cy.

SETUP Button

• GENERAL MODEL

Press this button to turn to the SCROLL

adjustment mode. If no action is taken for

5 seconds after pressing the button, it will

return to the play mode. (After entering

SETUP mode, PUSH functions of the

[TUNE] button to adjust SCROLL.)

497

Features of your vehicle

• EUROPE MODEL

Press this button to turn to the RDS

option, SCROLL adjustment mode. If no

action is taken for 5 seconds after press-

ing the button, it will return to the play

mode.

(After entering SETUP mode, move

between items using the left, right and

PUSH functions of the [TUNE] button.)

The setup item changes from SCROLL

➟ SDVC ➟ RDS ➟ RETURN ➟ AUDIO

➟ P.Bass

Sound Quality Control Knob

Pressing the button changes the AUDIO

mode. The mode selected is shown on

the display. After selecting each mode,

rotate the Audio control knob clockwise

or counterclockwise.

• BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the BASS,

rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the MID-

DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to

emphasize rear speaker sound (front

speaker sound will be attenuated). When

the control knob is turned counterclock-

wise, front speaker sound will be empha-

sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-

ated).

• BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

right speaker sound (left speaker sound

will be attenuated). When the control

knob is turned counter clockwise, left

speaker sound will be emphasized (right

speaker sound will be attenuated).

8. TA Button

In FM, CD, AUX mode, turns on/off the

reception of TA channels of RDS.

9. PTY (FLDR) Button

• Moves [FLDR ] button when search-

ing PTY in RDS Broadcasting Program

Type selection.

• Moves [PTY ] button when search-

ing PTY in RDS Broadcasting Program

Type selection.

10. FM/AM Button

Turns to FM or AM mode, and toggles in

the order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟

AMA ➟ FM1... when the button is

pressed each time.

Features of your vehicle

984

TQ_PA710_CD / TQ_PA710R_CD

CDP, AUX (PA710, GENERAL MODEL)

CDP, AUX (PA710R, EUROPE MODEL)

1. CD Slot

2. CD Eject Button

3. CD/AUX Button

4. TRACK Button

5. Fast Button

6. RANDOM Button

7. REPEAT Button

8. CD Indicator

9. SCAN Button

10. INFO Button

11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button

12. PTY (FLDR) Button

499

Features of your vehicle

Using CD Player

1. CD Slot

Insert CD with printed side upward and

gently push in. When the ignition switch

is on ACC or ON and power is off, power

is automatically turned on if the CD is

loaded. This CDP supports only 12cm

CD. If a VCD, Data CD are loaded,

"Reading Error" message will appear

and CD will be ejected.

2. CD Eject Button

Push button for less than 0.8 second

to eject the CD during CD playback.

This button is enabled when ignition

switch is off.

3. CD/AUX Button

If the auxiliary device is connected, it

switches to the AUX mode from the other

mode to play the sound from the auxiliary

player. If the CD is loaded, turns to CD

mode, and if a device is connected to

AUX then it toggles. CD ➟ AUX ➟ CD...

when the button is pressed each time. (It

will not turn to AUX if the auxiliary device

is not connected)

If no CD and auxiliary device is not con-

nected, it displays "No Media" for 3 sec-

onds and returns to the previous mode.

4. TRACK Button

• Push [TRACK ] button for less than

0.8 second to play from the beginning

of current song.

• Push [TRACK ] button for less than

0.8 second and press again within

1 seconds to play the previous song.

• Push [SEEK ] button for less than

0.8 second to play the next song.

5. Fast Button

• Push [FF] button for 0.8 second or

longer to initiate high speed sound

search of current song.

• Push [REW] button for 0.8 second or

longer to initiate reverse direction high

speed sound search of current song.

6. RANDOM Button

Press this button for less than 0.8 second

to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more than

0.8 second to activate ‘ALL RDM’ mode.

• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc

are played back in a random

sequence.

• ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in

a disc are played back in the random

sequence.

7. REPEAT Button

Press this button for less than 0.8 second

to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more than 0.8

second to activate ‘FLD RPT’ mode.

• RPT : Only a track(file) is repeatedly

played back.

• FLD RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only files

in a folder are repeatedly played back.

8. CD Indicator

When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON

and if the CD is loaded, this indicator is

lighted. If the CD is ejected, the icon is

turned off.

9. SCAN Button

Plays first 10 seconds of each song in

the DISC. To cancel the mode, press the

button once again.

Features of your vehicle

1004

10. INFO Button

Displays the information of the current

CD TRACK (FILE) as below when the

button is pressed each time.

• CDDA : DISC TITLE ➟ DISC ARTIST

➟ TRACK TITLE ➟ TRACK ARTIST ➟

TOTAL TRACK ➟ DISC TITLE...

• MP3/WMA : FILE NAME ➟ TITLE ➟

ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLDER NAME

➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ FILE NAME... (not

displayed if the information is not avail-

able on the DISC.)

11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER

Button

Turn this button clockwise to display the

songs next to the currently played song.

Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-

play the songs before the currently

played song. Press the button to skip and

play the selected song.

12. PTY (FLDR) Button

• Moves [FLDR ] button child folder of

the current folder and displays the first

song in the folder. Press TUNE/ENTER

knob to move to the folder displayed. It

will play the first song in the folder.

• Moves [PTY ], [FLDR ] button

parent folder and displays the first

song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to

the folder displayed.

4101

Features of your vehicle

1. USB Button

2. TRACK Button

3. RANDOM Button

4. REPEAT Button

5. INFO Button

6. PTY (FLDR) Button

7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button

8. SCAN Button

9. Fast Button

USB (PA710, GENERAL MODEL)

TQ_PA710_USB / TQ_PA710R_USB

USB (PA710R, EUROPE MODEL)

Features of your vehicle

1024

Using USB device

1. USB Button

If USB is connected, it switches to the

USB mode from the other mode to play

the song files stored in the USB.

If no CD and auxiliary device is not con-

nected, it displays “No Media” for 3 sec-

onds and returns to the previous mode.

2. TRACK Button

• Press the [TRACK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to play from the begin-

ning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-

ond and press it again within 1 sec-

onds to move and play the previous

track.

• Press the [SEEK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to move to the next

track.

3. RANDOM Button

Press this button for less than 0.8 second

to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more than

0.8 second to activate ‘ALL RDM’ mode.

• RDM : Only files in a folder are played

back in a random sequence.

• ALLRDM : All files in a USB memory

are played back in the random

sequence.

4. REPEAT Button

Press this button for less than 0.8 second

to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more than 0.8

second to activate ‘FLD RPT’ mode.

• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played

back.

• FLD RPT : Only files in a folder are

repeatedly played back.

5. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-

rently played in the order of FILE NAME

➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLD-

ER ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY

➟ FILE NAME... (Displays no information

if the file has no song information.)

6. PTY (FLDR) Button

• Moves [FLDR ] button sub folder of

the current folder and displays the first

song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to

the folder displayed. It will play the first

song in the folder.

• Moves [PTY ], [FLDR ] button

main folder and displays the first song

in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to

the folder displayed.

7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER

Button

Turn this button clockwise to display the

songs next to the currently played song.

Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-

play the songs before the currently

played song.

Press the button to skip and play the

selected song.

8. SCAN Button

Plays 10 seconds of each song in the

USB device.

Press the button once again to cancel

scanning.

4103

Features of your vehicle

9. Fast Button

• Push [FF] button for 0.8 second or

longer to initiate high speed sound

search of current song.

• Push [REW] button for 0.8 second or

longer to initiate reverse direction high

speed sound search of current song.

Features of your vehicle

1044

CAUTION IN USING USB

DEVICE

• To use an external USB device,

make sure the device is not con-

nected when starting up the vehi-

cle. Connect the device after

starting the vehicle.

• If you start the engine when the

USB device is connected, it may

damage the USB device. (USB

flashdrives are very sensitive to

electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or

turned off whilst the external USB

device is connected, the external

USB device may not work.

• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or

WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate between

8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music

files with the compression rate

between 8 Kbps~320 Kbps.

• Take precautions for static elec-

tricity when connecting or dis-

connecting the external USB

device.

(Continued)

• An encoded MP3 PLAYER is not

recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of

the external USB device, the con-

nected external USB device can

be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector

setting of External USB devices is

not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,

then the device will not be recog-

nized.

• Use only a USB device formatted

to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F

authentication may not be recog-

nizable.

• Make sure the USB connection

terminal does not come in con-

tact with the people or other

objects.

• If you repeatedly connect and dis-

connect the USB device in a short

period of time, you may cause

damage to the device.

• You may hear a strange noise

when connecting or disconnect-

ing a USB device.

(Continued)

• If you disconnect a external USB

device during playback in USB

mode, the external USB device

can be damaged or may malfunc-

tion. Therefore, disconnect the

external USB device when the

audio is turned off or in another

mode (e.g, Radio or CD).

• Depending on the type and

capacity of the external USB

device or the type of files stored

on the device there may be a

delay in the recognition of the

device. This is not an indicator of

trouble.

• Do not use the USB device for

purpose other than playing music

files.

• Use of USB accessories such as

recharges or heaters using USB

I/F may lower performance or

cause trouble.

(Continued)

4105

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• If you use devices such as a USB

hub purchased separately, the

vehicle’s audio system may not

recognize the USB device. In that

case, connect the USB device

directly to the multimedia termi-

nal of the vehicle.

• If USB device is divided by logical

drives, only the music files on the

highest-priority drive are recog-

nized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 players, cel-

lular phones and digital cameras

may not be compatible with a

standard USB I/F.

• Some non-standard USB devices

(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can

be unrecognizable.

• Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or

external-HDD type devices can be

unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM

(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-

MENT) are not recognizable.

(Continued)

• The data in the USB memory may

be lost whilst using this audio.

Always back up important data on

a personal storage device.

• Please avoid using USB memory

products which can be used as

key chains or cellular phone

accessories as they could cause

damage to the USB jack. Please

make certain only to use plug

type connector products as

shown below.

Features of your vehicle

1064

iPod (PA710, GENERAL MODEL)

iPod (PA710R, EUROPE MODEL)

1. iPod Button

2. TRACK Button

3. RANDOM Button

4. REPEAT Button

5. INFO Button

6. CATEGORY Button

7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button

8. Fast Button

❈ iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

TQ_PA710_iPod / TQ_PA710R_iPod

4107

Features of your vehicle

Using iPod

When the iPod is connected, the ‘iPod’

icon will be displayed on the top left cor-

ner of the display screen.

1. iPod Button

If iPod is connected, it switches to the

iPod mode from the CD mode to play the

song files stored in the iPod. If no CD and

auxiliary device is not connected, it dis-

plays “No Media” for 3 seconds and

returns to the previous mode.

2. TRACK Button

• Press the [TRACK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to play from the begin-

ning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-

ond and press it again within 1 sec-

onds to move and play the previous

track.

• Press the [SEEK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to move to the next

track.

3. RANDOM Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 second

to activate or deactivate the random play-

back of the songs within the current cat-

egory. Press the button for longer than

0.8 second to randomly play all songs in

the entire album of the iPod.

Press the button once again to cancel

the mode.

4. REPEAT Button

Repeats the song currently played.

5. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-

rently played in the order of TITLE ➟

ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ NORMAL DIS-

PLAY ➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST... (Displays no

information if the file has no song infor-

mation.)

6. CATEGORY Button

Moves to the upper category from cur-

rently played category of the iPod.

To move to the category displayed, press

SEARCH/ENTER Button.You will be able

to search through the lower category of

the selected category.

The order of iPod’s category is SONG,

ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and

iPod.

7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER

Button

When you turn the button clockwise, it

will display the songs (category) next to

the song currently played (category in

the same level).

Also, when you turn the button counter-

clockwise, it will display the songs (cate-

gory) before the song currently played

(category in the same level).

If you want to listen to the song displayed

in the song category, press the button,

then it will skip to the selected song and

play.

8. Fast Button

• Push [FF] button for 0.8 second or

longer to initiate high speed sound

search of current song.

• Push [REW] button for 0.8 second or

longer to initiate reverse direction high

speed sound search of current song.

✽

NOTICE FOR USING THE

iPod

DEVICE

• Some iPod models might not support

the communication protocol and the

files will not be played.

Supported iPod models:

- iPod Mini

- iPod 4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic) gen-

eration

- iPod Nano 1st~4th generation

- iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation

• The order of search or playback of

songs in the iPod can be different

from the order searched in the audio

system.

• If the iPod crashes due to its own mal-

function, reset the iPod. (Reset: Refer

to iPod manual)

• An iPod may not operate normally on

low battery.

• Some iPod devices, such as the

iPhone, can be connected through the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology inter-

face. The device must have audio

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology capa-

bility (such as for stereo headphone

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology). The

device can play, but it will not be con-

trolled by the audio system.

(Continued)

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer

function of an iPod when adjust-

ing the audio system’s volume,

and turn off the equalizer of the

audio system when using the

equalizer of an iPod.

• When the iPod cable is connect-

ed, the system can be switched to

the AUX mode even without the

iPod device and may cause noise.

Disconnect the iPod cable when

you are not using the iPod device.

• When not using iPod with car

audio, detach the iPod cable from

iPod. Otherwise, the iPod may

remain in accessory mode, and

may not work properly.

CAUTION IN USING THE

iPod

DEVICE

• The HYUNDAI iPod Power Cable

is needed in order to operate iPod

with the audio buttons on the

audio system. The USB cable pro-

vided by Apple may cause mal-

function and should not be used

for HYUNDAI vehicles.

❋

The HYUNDAI iPod Power Cable

may be purchased through your

HYUNDAI Dealership.

• When connecting the device with

the iPod Power Cable, insert the

connector to the multimedia

socket completely. If not inserted

completely, communications

between iPod and audio may be

interrupted.

• When adjusting the sound effects

of the iPod and the audio system,

the sound effects of both may

devices will overlap and might

reduce or distort the quality of the

sound.

(Continued)

4108

Features of your vehicle

4109

Features of your vehicle

1. FM/AM Button

2. POWER Button & VOLUME Knob

3. SEEK Button

4. Preset Buttons

5. BSM Button

6. TUNE & AUDIO Control Knob

RADIO, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (H800)

Features of your vehicle

1104

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CON-

TROL

1. FM/AM Button

Pressing the [FM/AM] button selects the

FM/AM band and toggles in the order of

FM1

➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ ... ➟ FM1... when

the button is pressed each time. FM/AM

Mode is displayed on the LCD.

2. POWER Button & Volume Knob

Turns the set on/off when the IGNITION

SWITCH is on ACC or ON.

If the button is turned to the right, it

increases the volume and left, decreases

the volume.

3. SEEK Button

• When the [SEEK ] button is

pressed, it increases the band fre-

quency to automatically select a chan-

nel. Stops at the previous frequency if

no channel is found.

• When the [TRACK ] button is

pressed, it reduces the band frequency

to automatically select a channel.

Stops at the previous frequency if no

channel is found.

4. Preset Buttons

Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-

ond to play the channel saved in each

button. Push Preset button for 0.8 sec-

ond or longer to save current channel to

the respective button with a beep.

5. BSM Button

When the button is pressed, it automati-

cally selects and saves channels with

high reception rate to [PRESET] buttons

[1]~[6] and plays the channel saved in

PRESET1. If no channel is saved after

BSM, it will play the previous channel.

6. TUNE & AUDIO Control Knob

Turn this control whilst listening to a radio

channel to manually adjust frequency.

Turn clockwise to increase frequency

and counterclockwise to reduce frequen-

cy.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,

TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE

mode. The mode selected is shown on

the display.

After selecting each mode, rotate the

Audio control knob clockwise or counter-

clockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the BASS,

rotate the knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to

emphasize rear speaker sound (front

speaker sound will be attenuated).

When the control knob is turned counter-

clockwise, front speaker sound will be

emphasized (rear speaker sound will be

attenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

right speaker sound (left speaker sound

will be attenuated). When the control

knob is turned counter clockwise, left

speaker sound will be emphasized (right

speaker sound will be attenuated).

4111

Features of your vehicle

USING USB/AUX (H800)

1. USB Button

2. TRACK Button

3. FF (FAST FORWARD) Button

4. REW (REWIND) Button

5. RPT (REPEAT) Button

6. RDM (RANDOM) Button

7. FLDR (FOLDER) Button

8. SCAN Button

9. INFO Button

10. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button

Features of your vehicle

1124

USING USB/AUX

1. USB Button

If USB/AUX is connected, it switches to

the USB/AUX mode from the other mode

to play the song files stored in the USB.

If no USB and auxiliary device is con-

nected, it displays "NO Media" for 3 sec-

onds and returns to the previous mode.

❋

AUX Button

If the auxiliary device is connected, it

turns to AUX mode from the other mode

to play the sound from the auxiliary play-

er. If no auxiliary device is connected, it

displays "NO Media" for 3 seconds and

returns to the previous mode.

2. TRACK Button

• Press the [TRACK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to play from the begin-

ning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-

ond and press it again within 1 second

to move and play the previous track.

• Press the [SEEK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to move to the next

track.

3. FF (FAST FORWORD) Button

Press the button for 0.8 second or longer

to play the song in forward direction in

fast speed.

4. REW (REWIND) Button

Press the button for 0.8 second or longer

to play the song in reverse direction in

fast speed.

5. RPT (REPEAT) Button

Press this button for less than 0.8 second

to activate 'RPT' mode and more than

0.8 second to activate 'FLD RPT' mode.

• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played

back.

• FLD RPT : Only files in a folder are

repeatedly played back.

6. RDM (RANDOM) Button

Press this button for less than 0.8 second

to activate 'RDM' mode and more than

0.8 second to activate 'ALL RDM' mode.

• RDM : Only files in a folder are played

back in a random sequence.

• ALL RDM : All files in a USB memory

are played back in the random

sequence.

7. FLDR (FOLDER) Button

• Moves [FLDR ] button sub folder of

the current folder and displays the first

song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to

the folder displayed. It will play the first

song in the folder.

• Moves [FLDR ] button main folder

and displays the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to

the folder displayed.

8. SCAN Button

Plays 10 seconds of each song in the

USB device.

Press the button once again to cancel

scanning.

9. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-

rently played in the order of FILE NAME

➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLD-

ER ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY

➟ FILE NAME... (Displays no information

if the file has no song information.)

4113

Features of your vehicle

10. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button

Turn this button clockwise to display the

songs next to the currently played song.

Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-

play the songs before the currently

played song.

Press the button to skip and play the

selected song.

CAUTION IN USING USB

DEVICE

• To use an external USB device,

make sure the device is not con-

nected when starting up the vehi-

cle. Connect the device after

starting up.

• If you start the engine when the

USB device is connected, it may

damage the USB device. (USB

flashdrives are very sensitive to

electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or

turned off whilst the external USB

device is connected, the external

USB device may not work.

• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or

WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate between

8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music

files with the compression rate

between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static elec-

tricity when connecting or dis-

connecting the external USB

device.

(Continued)

• An encoded MP3 PLAYER is not

recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of

the external USB device, the con-

nected external USB device can

be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector

setting of External USB devices is

not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,

then the device will not be recog-

nized.

• Use only a USB device formatted

to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F

authentication may not be recog-

nizable.

• Make sure the USB connection

terminal does not come in con-

tact with the human body or other

objects.

• If you repeatedly connecting or

disconnecting the USB device in

a short period of time, it may

breakthe device.

• You may hear a noise when con-

necting or disconnecting a USB

device.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1144

(Continued)

• If you disconnect the external

USB device during playback in

USB mode, the external USB

device can be damaged or may

malfunction. Therefore, discon-

nect the external USB device

when the audio is turned off or in

another mode. (e.g, Radio or AUX)

• Depending on the type and

capacity of the external USB

device or the type of the files

stored in the device, there is a dif-

ference in the time taken for

recognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device for

purposes other than playing

music files.

• Use of USB accessories such as

rechargers or heaters using USB

I/F may lower performance or

cause trouble.

• If you use devices such as a USB

hub purchased separately, the

vehicle’s audio system may not

recognize the USB device. In that

case, connect the USB device

directly to the multimedia termi-

nal of the vehicle.

(Continued)

• If the USB device is divided by

logical drives, only the music files

on the highest-priority drive are

recognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/

Cellular phone/Digital camera can

be unrecognizable by standard

USB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Some non-standard USB devices

(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can

be unrecognizable.

• Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or

external-HDD type devices can be

unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM

(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-

MENT) are not recognizalbe.

• The data in the USB memory may

be lost whilst using this audio.

Always back up important data on

a personal storage device.

(Continued)

• Please avoid using USB memory

products which can be used as

key chains or cellular phone

accessories as they could cause

damage to the USB jack. Please

make certain only to use plug

type connector products as

shown below.

4115

Features of your vehicle

1. iPod Button

2. TRACK Button

3. RDM(RANDOM) Button

4. RPT(REPEAT) Button

5. MENU Button

6. INFO Button

7. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button

USING iPod (H800)

❈ iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Features of your vehicle

1164

USING iPod

When the iPod is connected, the 'iPod'

icon will be displayed on the top left cor-

ner of the display screen.

1. iPod Button

If iPod is connected, it switches to the

iPod mode from the Radio mode to play

the song files stored in the iPod. If iPod is

not connected, it displays "NO Media" for

3 seconds and returns to the previous

mode.

2. TRACK Button

• Press the [TRACK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to play from the begin-

ning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-

ond and press it again within 1 second

to move and play the previous track.

Press the button for 0.8 second or

longer to play the song in reverse

direction in fast speed.

• Press the [SEEK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to move to the next

track. Press the button for 0.8 second

or longer to play the song in forward

direction in fast speed.

3. RDM (RANDOM) Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 second

to activate or deactivate the random play-

back of the songs within the current cat-

egory. Press the button for longer than

0.8 second to randomly play all songs in

the entire album of the iPod.

Press the button once again to cancel

the mode.

4. RPT (REPEAT) Button

Repeats the song currently played.

5. MENU Button

Moves to the upper category from cur-

rently played category of the iPod.

To move to (play) the category (song)

displayed, MENU (preset6) You will be

able to search through the lower catego-

ry of the selected category.

The order of iPod's category is SONG,

ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and

iPod.

6. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-

rently played in the order of TITLE ➟

ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ NORMAL DIS-

PLAY ➟ TITLE ➟... (Displays no informa-

tion if the file has no song information.)

7. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button

When you turn the button clockwise, it

will display the songs (category) next to

the song currently played (category in

the same level).

Also, when you turn the button counter-

clockwise, it will display the songs (cate-

gory) before the song currently played

(category in the same level).

If you want to listen to the song displayed

in the song category, press the button,

then it will skip to the selected song and

play.

4117

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE FOR USING THE

iPod DEVICE

• Some iPod models might not support

the communication protocol and the

files will not be played.

Supported iPod models:

- iPod Mini

- iPod 4th(Photo) ~ 6th(Classic)

generation

- iPod Nano 1st~4th generation

- iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation

• The order of search or playback of

songs in the iPod can be different

from the order searched in the audio

system.

• If the iPod disabled due to its own

malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:

Refer to iPod manual)

• An iPod may not operate normally on

low battery.

• Some iPod devices, such as the

iPhone, can be connected through the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technolog inter-

face. The device must have audio

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology capa-

bility (such as for stereo headphone

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology). The

device can play, but it will not be con-

trolled by the audio system.

CAUTION IN USING THE

iPod DEVICE

• The HYUNDAI iPod Power Cable

is needed in order to operate iPod

with the audio buttons on the

audio system. The USB cable pro-

vided by Apple may cause mal-

function and should not be used

for HYUNDAI vehicles.

❋

The HYUNDAI iPod Power

Cable may be purchased

through your HYUNDAI

Dealership.

• When connecting the device with

the iPod Power Cable, insert the

connector to the multimedia

socket completely. If not inserted

completely, communications

between iPod and audio may be

interrupted.

• When adjusting the sound effects

of the iPod and the audio system,

the sound effects of both may

devices will overlap and might

reduce or distort the quality of the

sound.

(Continued)

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer

function of an iPod when adjust-

ing the audio system’s volume,

and turn off the equalizer of the

audio system when using the

equalizer of an iPod.

• When the iPod cable is connect-

ed, the system can be switched to

the AUX mode even without the

iPod device and may cause noise.

Disconnect the iPod cable when

you are not using the iPod device.

• When not using iPod with car

audio, detach the iPod cable from

iPod. Otherwise, the iPod may

remain in accessory mode, and

may not work properly.

Before driving / 5-3

Key positions / 5-4

Starting the engine / 5-6

Manual transmission / 5-8

Automatic transmission / 5-11

Brake system / 5-18

Locking differential / 5-28

Economical operation / 5-29

Special driving conditions / 5-31

Winter driving / 5-36

Trailer towing / 5-40

Vehicle weight / 5-48

Driving your vehicle

E010000AEN-EA

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-

dows immediately.

• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.

Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colourless, odourless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyx-

iation.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear

a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, we rec-

ommend that the system be checked by an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your

garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area

with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are

kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

Driving your vehicle

E020100AUN-EA

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.

• Check the condition of the tyres.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

E020200BUN

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid

should be checked on a regular basis,

with the exact interval depending on the

fluid. Further details are provided in

Section 7, “Maintenance”.

E020300BUN-EA

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.

• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position.

• Release the parking brake and make

sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-

iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING

All passengers must be properly

belted whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section

3 for more information on their

proper use.

WARNING

Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for people,

especially children, before putting a

car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING

Driving whilst distracted can result in

a loss of vehicle control, that may

lead to an accident, severe personal

injury, and death. The driver’s pri-

mary responsibility is in the safe and

legal operation of a vehicle, and use

of any handheld devices, other equip-

ment, or vehicle systems which take

the driver’s eyes, attention and focus

away from the safe operation of a

vehicle or which are not permissible

by law should never be used during

operation of the vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

E030100AEN

Illuminated ignition switch

(if equipped)

Whenever a front door is opened, the

ignition switch will be illuminated for your

convenience, provided the ignition switch

is not in the ON position. The light will go

off immediately when the ignition switch

is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-

onds when the door is closed.

KEY POSITIONS

OTQ057001

WARNING - Driving under

the influence of alcohol or

drugs

Driving under the influence of

drugs or alcohol is dangerous and

is one of the major contributing fac-

tors to the road deaths each year.

Even a small amount of alcohol will

affect your reflexes, perceptions

and judgement. Driving whilst

under the influence of drugs is as

dangerous or more dangerous than

driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have a

serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs,

don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-

er who has been drinking or taking

drugs. Choose a designated driver

or call a cab.

WARNING

• When you intend to park or stop

the vehicle with the engine on, be

careful not to depress the accel-

erator pedal for a long period of

time. It may overheat the engine

or exhaust system and cause fire.

• When you make a sudden stop or

turn the steering wheel rapidly,

loose objects may drop on the

floor and it could interfere with

the operation of the foot pedals,

possibly causing an accident.

Keep all things in the vehicle

safely stored.

• If you do not focus on driving, it

may cause an accident. Be care-

ful when operating what may dis-

turb driving such as audio or

heater. It is the responsibility of

the driver to always drive safely.

Driving your vehicle

Ignition switch position

E030201AUN

LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect

against theft. The ignition key can be

removed only in the LOCK position.

When turning the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, push the key inward at

the ACC position and turn the key toward

the LOCK position.

E030202AUN-EA

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-

trical accessories are operative.

✽

NOTICE

If difficulty is experienced in turning the

ignition switch to the ACC position, turn

the key whilst turning steering wheel

right and left to release the tension.

E030203AUN

The warning lights can be checked

before the engine is started. This is the

normal running position after the engine

is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the

engine is not running to prevent battery

discharge.

E030204AUN-EA

START

Turn the ignition key to the START posi-

tion to start the engine. The engine will

crank until you release the key; then it

returns to the ON position. The brake

warning lamp can be checked in this

position.

E030205AUN

WARNING - Ignition

switch

• Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC whilst the vehicle is

moving. This would result in loss of

directional control and braking

function, which could cause an acci-

dent.

• The anti-theft steering column lock

is not a substitute for the parking

brake. Before leaving the driver’s

seat, always make sure the shift

lever is engaged in P (Park) for the

automatic transmission and set the

parking brake fully and shut the

engine off. Unexpected and sudden

vehicle movement may occur if

these precautions are not taken.

• Never reach for the ignition switch,

or any other controls through the

steering wheel whilst the vehicle is

in motion. The presence of your

hand or arm in this area could cause

a loss of vehicle control, an accident

and serious bodily injury or death.

• Do not place any movable objects

around the driver’s seat as they may

move whilst driving, interfere with

the driver and lead to an accident

OTQ057002

Driving your vehicle

E040000BUN

E040100BUN-EA

Starting the petrol engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Manual Transmission - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and shift the trans-

mission into Neutral. Keep the clutch

pedal and brake pedal depressed

whilst turning the ignition switch to the

start position.

Automatic Transmission - Place the

transmission shift lever in P (Park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when

the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)

position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START and

hold it there until the engine starts (a

maximum of 10 seconds), then

release the key.

4. Do not wait for the engine to warm up

whilst the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine

speeds. (Steep accelerating and decel-

erating should be avoided.)

It should be started without depressing

the accelerator.

E040101AUN-EA

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the

engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated

before starting the engine and then have

to be warmed up before starting to drive.

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Manual Transmission - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and shift the trans-

mission into Neutral. Keep the clutch

pedal and brake pedal depressed

whilst turning the ignition switch to the

start position.

Automatic Transmission - Place the

transmission shift lever in P(park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the

shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski

boots,etc.) may interfere with

your ability to use the brake and

accelerator pedal, and the clutch

(if equipped).

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed. The

vehicle can move and lead to an

accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is nor-

mal. The vehicle may suddenly

move if the brake padel is

released when the rpm is high.

CAUTION

If the engine stalls whilst you are in

motion, do not attempt to move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position. If

traffic and road conditions permit,

you may put the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position whilst the vehicle

is still moving and turn the ignition

switch to the START position in an

attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION

• Do not crank the engine for more

than 10 seconds. If the engine

stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10

seconds before cranking the

engine again. Improper use of the

starter motor may cause damage

to it.

• Do not turn the ignition switch to

the START position with the engine

running. It may damage the starter.

Driving your vehicle

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion to pre-heat the engine. Then the

glow indicator light will illuminate.

4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn

the ignition switch to the START posi-

tion and hold it there until the engine

starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),

then release the key.

✽

NOTICE

If the engine is not started within 10 sec-

onds after the preheating is completed,

turn the ignition key once more to the

LOCK position during 10 seconds, and

then to the ON position, in order to pre-

heat again.

E040101ATQ

✽

NOTICE - A2.5 Diesel Engine

If the accelerator is pressed for a long

time whilst standing still, the engine

power will be limited to prevent the

exhaust parts from overheating.

Starting and stopping the engine for tur-

bocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine

immediately after starting.

If the engine is cold, idle for several

seconds before sufficient lubrication is

ensured in the turbocharger unit.

2. After high speed or extended driving,

requiring a heavy engine load, idle the

engine about 1 minute before turning it

off.

This idle time will allow the tur-

bocharger to cool prior to shutting the

engine off.

W-60

Glow indicator light

CAUTION

Do not turn the engine off immedi-

ately after it has been subjected to

a heavy load. Doing so may cause

severe damage to the engine or tur-

bocharger unit.

Driving your vehicle

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

E050100CTQ-EA

Manual transmission operation

The manual transmission has 5 forward

gears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift

knob. The transmission is fully synchro-

nised in all forward gears so shifting to

either a higher or a lower gear is easily

accomplished.

Press the clutch pedal down fully whilst

shifting, then release it slowly.

If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-

tion lock switch, the engine will not start

when starting the engine without

depressing the clutch pedal. (if equipped)

The gearshift lever must be returned to

the neutral position before shifting into R

(Reverse).

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).

Never operate the engine with the

tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

• During cold weather, shifting may be

difficult until the transmission lubricant

is warmed up. This is normal and not

harmful to the transmission.

• If you've come to a complete stop and

it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),

leave the shift lever N(Neutral) position

and release the at clutch. Press the

clutch pedal back down, and then shift

into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position.

OTQ057004

CAUTION

• When downshifting from fifth

gear to fourth gear, caution

should be taken not to inadver-

tently press the gear shift lever

sideways in such a manner that

second gear is engaged. Such a

drastic downshift may cause the

engine speed to increase to the

point that the tachometer will

enter the red-zone. Such over-

revving of the engine may possi-

bly cause engine damage.

• Do not downshift more than 2

gears or downshift the gear when

the engine is running at high

speed (5,000 RPM or higher).

Such a downshifting may damage

the engine, clutch and the trans-

mission.

CAUTION

• To avoid premature clutch wear

and damage, do not drive with

your foot resting on the clutch

pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch

to hold the vehicle stopped on an

uphill grade, whilst waiting for a

traffic light, etc.

• Do not use the shift lever as a

handrest during driving, as this

can result in premature wear of

the transmission shift forks.

• To prevent possible damage to

the clutch system, do not start

with the 2nd (second) gear

engaged except when you start

on a slippery road.

Driving your vehicle

E050101AUN

Using the clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way

to the floor before shifting, then released

slowly. The clutch pedal should always be

fully released whilst driving. Do not rest

your foot on the clutch pedal whilst driv-

ing. This can cause unnecessary wear.

Do not partially engage the clutch to hold

the car on an incline. This causes unnec-

essary wear. Use the foot brake or park-

ing brake to hold the car on an incline. Do

not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and

repeatedly.

E050102AUN-EA

Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traf-

fic or whilst driving up steep hills, down-

shift before the engine starts to labour.

Downshifting reduces the chance of

stalling and gives better acceleration

when you again need to increase your

speed. When the vehicle is travelling

down steep hills, downshifting helps

maintain safe speed and prolongs brake

life.

E050200AUN

Good driving practices

• Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This is extremely

hazardous. Always leave the car in

gear.

• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause

them to overheat and malfunction.

Instead, when you are driving down a

long hill, shift to a lower gear. When

you do this, engine braking will help

slow the car.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. This will help avoid over-revving

the engine, which can cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter cross

winds. This gives you much better con-

trol of your car.

• Be sure the car is completely stopped

before you attempt to shift into reverse.

The transmission can be damaged if

you do not. To shift into reverse,

depress the clutch, move the shift lever

to neutral, wait 3 seconds, then shift to

the reverse position.

WARNING

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always set the parking brake fully

and shut the engine off. Then

make sure the transmission is

shifted into 1st gear when the

vehicle is parked on a level or

uphill grade, and shifted into R

(Reverse) on a downhill grade.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle

movement can occur if these pre-

cautions are not followed in the

order identified.

• If your vehicle has a manual

transaxle not equipped with a

ignition lock switch, it may move

and cause a serious accident

when starting the engine without

depressing the clutch pedal

whilst the parking brake is

released and the shift lever not in

the N(Neutral) position.

• Do not use the engine brake

(shifting from a high gear to

lower gear) rapidly on slippery

roads. The vehicle may slip caus-

ing an accident.

Driving your vehicle

105

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-

its.

511

Driving your vehicle

E060000AEN

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.

O/D button

Type A

Lock release button prevents shift lever

movement without first depressing the

button.

Lock release button prevents shift lever

movement without first depressing the

button.

Automatic mode

Sports mode

Depress the brake pedal and lock release button when shifting, if your vehicle is equipped with shift lock system.

The lock release button must be depressed whilst moving the shift lever.

OTQ057006R/OTQ057006R-1

Type B

Driving your vehicle

125

E060100BTQ-EA

Automatic transmission operation

The automatic transmission has 5 (or 4)

forward speeds and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected auto-

matically, depending on the position of

the shift lever.

✽

NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or

if the battery has been disconnected,

may be somewhat abrupt. This is a nor-

mal condition, and the shifting sequence

will adjust after shifts are cycled a few

times by the TCM (Transmission

Control Module) or PCM (Powertrain

Control Module).

For smooth operation, depress the brake

pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a

forward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Automatic

transmission

• Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for peo-

ple, especially children, before

shifting a car into D (Drive) or R

(Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position; then

set the parking brake fully and

shut the engine off. Unexpected

and sudden vehicle movement

can occur if these precautions

are not followed in the order iden-

tified.

• Do not use the engine brake

(shifting from a high gear to

lower gear) rapidly on slippery

roads. The vehicle may slip caus-

ing an accident.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to your trans-

mission, do not accelerate the

engine in R (Reverse) or any for-

ward gear position with the

brakes on.

• When stopped on an incline, do

not hold the vehicle stationary

with engine power. Use the serv-

ice brake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P

(Park) into D (Drive), or R

(Reverse) when the engine is

above idle speed.

513

Driving your vehicle

E060101CTQ

Transmission ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster

displays the shift lever position when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into P (Park). This position locks

the transmission and prevents the drive

wheels from rotating.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not

engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even

on the slightest incline unless the parking

brake or service brakes are applied.

CAUTION

The transmission may be damaged

if you shift into P (Park) whilst the

vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transmission if you shift into R

whilst the vehicle is in motion,

except as explained in “Rocking the

vehicle” in this section.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) whilst the

vehicle is in motion will cause the

drive wheels to lock which will

cause you to lose control of the

vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) position

in place of the parking brake.

Always make sure the shift lever

is latched in the P (Park) position

and set the parking brake fully.

• Never leave a child unattended in

a vehicle.

WARNING

Do not drive with the shift lever in N

(Neutral).

The engine brake will not work and

lead to an accident.

Driving your vehicle

145

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving posi-

tion. The transmission will automatically

shift through a 5 (or 4)-gear sequence,

providing the best fuel economy and

power.

For extra power when passing another

vehicle or climbing grades, depress the

accelerator fully, at which time the trans-

mission will automatically downshift to

the next lower gear.

✽

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into D (Drive).

2 (Second Gear, if equipped)

Use 2 (Second Gear) for more power

when climbing hills and for increased

braking when going down hills. This posi-

tion also helps reduce wheel spin on slip-

pery surfaces. When the shift lever is

placed in 2 (Second Gear), the transmis-

sion will automatically shift from first to

second gear.

L (Low, if equipped)

Move the shift lever to this position in

hard pulling situations and for climbing

steep grades.

O/D (Over Drive) system

(if equipped)

Pressing the O/D system button cancels

and engages the overdrive system.

When the O/D system is cancelled, the

O/D OFF indicator illuminates and the

transmission gear range is limited to 1st

through 3rd.

OTQ057007R

CAUTION

Do not exceed the recommended

maximum speeds in 2 (Second

Gear) or L (Low). Operating the

vehicle at speeds above the maxi-

mum recommended, for 2 (Second

Gear) or L (Low) may cause exces-

sive heat to develop which could

result in damage to or failure of the

automatic transmission.

515

Driving your vehicle

The transmission will not shift to 4th gear

until the O/D system button is pressed

again to release the switch.

When driving down a sloping road with

the transmission in O/D (4th), you can

decrease the vehicle speed without using

the brakes by pressing the O/D button.

When the ignition is switched OFF, O/D

OFF mode is automatically cancelled.

O/D OFF Indicator

This indicator light illuminates in the

instrument panel when the O/D mode is

cancelled.

E060102BTQ

Sports mode (if equipped)

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in

motion, sports mode is selected by push-

ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-

tion into the manual gate. To return to D

(Drive) range operation, push the shift

lever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift lever

backwards and forwards will allow you to

make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a

manual transmission, the sports mode

allows gearshifts with the accelerator

pedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to

shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once

to shift down one gear.

✽

NOTICE

• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with road

conditions, taking care to keep the

engine speed below the red zone.

• In sports mode, only the 5 forward

gears can be selected. To reverse or

park the vehicle, move the shift lever

to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position

as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are made

automatically when the vehicle slows

down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear

is automatically selected.

• In sports mode, when the engine rpm

approaches the red zone shift points

are varied to upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels of

vehicle performance and safety, the

system may not execute certain

gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-

ated.

• When driving on a slippery road,

push the shift lever forward into the

+(up) position. This causes the trans-

mission to shift into the 2nd gear

which is better for smooth driving on

a slippery road. Push the shift lever to

the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st

gear.

OTQ057007R-1

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports mode

Driving your vehicle

165

E060200AEN

Good driving practices

• Never move the gear shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-

tion with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the gear shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the car is completely stopped

before you attempt to shift into R

(Reverse).

• Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This may be

extremely hazardous. Always leave the

car in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can

cause them to overheat and malfunc-

tion. Instead, when you are driving

down a long hill, shift to a lower gear.

When you do this, engine braking will

help slow the car.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may

not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do not

depend on placing the transmission in

P (Park) to keep the car from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the accelera-

tor pedal.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

(Continued)

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-

its.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward of backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

517

Driving your vehicle

E060203AUN-EA

Moving up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start

To move up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift

the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the

appropriate gear depending on load

weight and steepness of the grade, and

release the parking brake. Depress the

accelerator gradually whilst releasing the

service brakes.

When accelerating from a stop on a

steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-

dency to roll backwards. Shifting the

shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will

help prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards (if equipped).

E060203ATQ

Shift lock system (if equipped)

For your safety, the Automatic

Transmission has a shift lock system

which prevents shifting the transmission

out of P (Park) unless the brake pedal is

depressed.

To shift the transmission out of P (Park):

Type A

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Depress the lock release button and

move the shift lever.

Type B (If the ignition key interlock sys-

tem is equipped)

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to

the ON position.

3. Depress the lock release button and

move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedly

depressed and released with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering

sound near the shift lever may be heard.

This is a normal condition.

Ignition key interlock system

(if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removed

unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position. If the ignition switch is in any

other position, the key cannot be

removed.

Driving your vehicle

185

E070100BUN

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes

that adjust automatically through normal

usage.

In the event that the power-assisted

brakes lose power because of a stalled

engine or some other reason, you can

still stop your vehicle by applying greater

force to the brake pedal than you nor-

mally would. The stopping distance, how-

ever, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the

reserve brake power is partially depleted

each time the brake pedal is applied. Do

not pump the brake pedal when the

power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when neces-

sary to maintain steering control on slip-

pery surfaces.

E070101AUN

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate whilst the

vehicle is in motion, you can make an

emergency stop with the parking brake.

The stopping distance, however, will be

much greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Parking brake

Applying the parking brake whilst

the vehicle is moving at normal

speeds can cause a sudden loss of

control of the vehicle. If you must

use the parking brake to stop the

vehicle, use great caution in apply-

ing the brake.

(Continued)

• When descending a long or steep

hill, shift to a lower gear and

avoid continuous application of

the brakes. Continuous brake

application will cause the brakes

to overheat and could result in a

temporary loss of braking per-

formance.

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-

cle’s ability to safely slow down;

the vehicle may also pull to one

side when the brakes are applied.

Applying the brakes lightly will

indicate whether they have been

affected in this way. Always test

your brakes in this fashion after

driving through deep water. To

dry the brakes, apply them lightly

whilst maintaining a safe forward

speed until brake performance

returns to normal.

• Always, confirm the position of

the brake and accelerator pedal

before driving. If you do not

check the position of the acceler-

ator and brake pedal before driv-

ing, you may depress the acceler-

ator instead of the brake pedal. It

may cause a serious accident.

WARNING - Brakes

• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This will

create abnormal high brake tem-

peratures, excessive brake lining

and pad wear, and increased

stopping distances.

(Continued)

519

Driving your vehicle

E070102AUN-EA

Disc brakes wear indicator

Your vehicle has disc brakes.

When your brake pads are worn and new

pads are required, you will hear a high-

pitched warning sound from your front or

rear brakes (if equipped). You may hear

this sound come and go or it may occur

whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving con-

ditions or climates may cause a brake

squeal when you first apply (or lightly

apply) the brakes. This is normal and

does not indicate a problem with your

brakes.

Parking brake

E070201BFD

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply

the foot brake and then without pressing

the release button in, pull the parking

brake lever up as far as possible. In addi-

tion it is recommended that when parking

the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever

should be positioned in the appropriate

low gear on manual transmission vehi-

cles or in the P (Park) position on auto-

matic transmission vehicles.

OTQ057008

WARNING

- Brake wear

This brake wear warning sound

means your vehicle needs service.

If you ignore this audible warning,

you will eventually lose braking

performance, which could lead to a

serious accident.

CAUTION

• To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

• Always replace brake pads as

complete front or rear axle sets.

CAUTION

• Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause excessive

brake pad and brake rotor wear.

• Do not operate the parking brake

whilst the vehicle is moving

except in an emergency situation.

It could damage the vehicle sys-

tem and make endanger driving

safety.

Driving your vehicle

205

E070202AFD

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first apply

the foot brake and pull up the parking

brake lever slightly. Secondly depress the

release button (1) and lower the parking

brake lever (2) whilst holding the button.

Check the brake warning light by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). This light will be illuminated when

the parking brake is applied with the igni-

tion switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake

is fully released and the brake warning

light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after

the parking brake is released whilst

engine is running, there may be a mal-

function in the brake system. Immediate

attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-

cle immediately. If that is not possible,

use extreme caution whilst operating the

vehicle and only continue to drive the

vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-

tion or repair shop.

WARNING

• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leaving

the vehicle, do not use the

gearshift lever in place of the

parking brake. Set the parking

brake AND make sure the

gearshift lever is securely posi-

tioned in 1st (First) gear or R

(Reverse) for manual transmis-

sion equipped vehicles and in P

(Park) for automatic transmission

equipped vehicles.

• Never allow anyone who is unfa-

miliar with the vehicle to touch

the parking brake. If the parking

brake is released unintentionally,

serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always have

the parking brake fully engaged

when parking to avoid inadver-

tent movement of the car which

can injure occupants or pedestri-

ans.

OTQ057009

W-75

521

Driving your vehicle

E070300AEN-EA

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

(if equipped)

* : Some countries use the term ESC

(Electronic stability control) instead of

ESP. Please refer to the term your

country use.

The ABS continuously senses the speed

of the wheels. If the wheels are going to

lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-

lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the

wheels.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit

from your ABS in an emergency situa-

tion, do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to pump

your brakes. Press your brake pedal as

hard as possible or as hard as the situa-

tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-

trol the force being delivered to the

brakes.

WARNING

ABS (ESC*) will not prevent acci-

dents due to improper or danger-

ous driving manoeuvres. Even

though vehicle control is improved

during emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance between

you and objects ahead. Vehicle

speeds should always be reduced

during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for cars

equipped with an anti-lock braking

system (Electronic Stability Control

System*) may be longer than for

those without it in the following

road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicle

should be driven at reduced

speeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.

• With tyre chains installed.

• On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surface

height.

(Continued)

The safety features of an ABS

(ESC*) equipped vehicle should not

be tested by high speed driving or

cornering. This could endanger the

safety of yourself or others.

Driving your vehicle

225

✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the anti-lock brake system

is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,

your vehicle still requires sufficient

stopping distance. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front

of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.

The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from exces-

sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake system

may result in a longer stopping dis-

tance than for vehicles equipped with a

conventional brake system.

✽

NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the engine

may not run as smoothly and the ABS

warning light may turn on at the same

time. This happens because of the low

battery voltage. It does not mean your

ABS is malfunctioning.

• Do not pump your brakes!

• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION

• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problem

with the ABS. In this case, howev-

er, your regular brakes will work

normally.

• The ABS warning light will stay on

for approximately 3 seconds after

the ignition switch is ON. During

that time, the ABS will go through

self-diagnosis and the light will go

off if everything is normal. If the

light stays on, you may have a

problem with your ABS. Contact

an authorised HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,

and operate your brakes continu-

ously, the ABS will be active con-

tinuously and the ABS warning

light may illuminate. Pull your car

over to a safe place and stop the

engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your

ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a prob-

lem with the ABS. Contact an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

523

Driving your vehicle

Electronic stability control (ESC)*

(If equipped)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

system is designed to stabilise the vehi-

cle during cornering maneuvers. ESC

checks where you are steering and

where the vehicle is actually going. ESC

applies the brakes at individual wheels

and intervenes in the engine manage-

ment system to stabilise the vehicle.

* : Some countries use the term ESP

(Electronic stability program) instead

of ESC. Please refer to the term your

country use.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

system is an electronic system designed

to help the driver maintain vehicle control

under adverse conditions. It is not a

substitute for safe driving practices.

Factors including speed, road conditions

and driver steering input can all affect

whether ESC will be effective in

preventing a loss of control. It is still your

responsibility to drive and corner at

reasonable speeds and to leave a

sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ESC is active.

✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the Electronic Stability

Control System is functioning properly.

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road con-

ditions or too quickly when corner-

ing. Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet

surfaces can still result in serious

accidents. Only a safe and attentive

driver can prevent accidents by

avoiding maneuvers that cause the

vehicle to lose traction. Even with

ESC installed, always follow all the

normal precautions for driving -

including driving at safe speeds for

the conditions.

OTQ051010R

Driving your vehicle

245

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turned

ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-

cator lights illuminate for

approximately 3 seconds,

then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF button

for at least half a second after

turning the ignition ON to turn

ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator

will illuminate). To turn the

ESC on, press the ESC OFF

button (ESC OFF indicator

light will go off).

• When starting the engine,

you may hear a slight ticking

sound. This is the ESC per-

forming an automatic system

self-check and does not indi-

cate a problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation,

ESC indicator light blinks.

• When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly,

you can feel a slight pulsation

in the vehicle. This is only the

effect of brake control and

indicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mud

or slippery road, pressing the

accelerator pedal may not

cause the engine rpm (revo-

lutions per minute) to

increase.

ESC operation off

ESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,

press the ESC OFF button

(ESC OFF indicator light illu-

minates).

• If the ignition switch is turned

to the LOCK position when

ESC is off, ESC remains off.

Upon restarting the engine,

the ESC will automatically

turn on again.

525

Driving your vehicle

Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned ON, the

indicator light illuminates, then goes off if

the ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever

ESC is operating or illuminates when

ESC fails to operate. ESC OFF indicator

light comes on when the ESC is turned

off with the button.

✽

NOTICE

After reconnecting or recharging a dis-

charged battery, the ESC indicator may

illuminate. In this case, turn the steering

wheel half way to the left and right

whilst the ignition switch is in the ON

position. Then, restart the engine after

the ignition is off. If the ESC indicator

does not turn off, have the system

checked by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

E070504AUN-EA

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• The ESC turned on for daily driving

whenever possible.

• To turn ESC off whilst driving, press

the ESC OFF button whilst driving on a

flat road surface.

Never press the ESC OFF button whilst

ESC is operating (ESC indicator light

blinks).

If ESC is turned off whilst ESC is operat-

ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.

✽

NOTICE

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is

turned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-

ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-

vent the vehicle speed from increas-

ing, and result in false diagnosis.

• Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or brake system operation.

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

CAUTION

Driving with varying tyre or wheel

sizes may cause the ESC system to

malfunction. When replacing tyres,

make sure they are the same size as

your original tyres.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Control sys-

tem is only a driving aid; use pre-

cautions for safe driving by slowing

down on curved, snowy, or icy

roads. Drive slowly and don’t

attempt to accelerate whenever the

ESC indicator light is blinking, or

when the road surface is slippery.

Driving your vehicle

265

E070600AFD-EA

Good braking practices

• After being parked, check to be sure

the parking brake is not engaged and

that the parking brake indicator light is

out before driving away.

• Driving through water may get the

brakes wet. They can also get wet

when the car is washed. Wet brakes

can be dangerous! Your car will not

stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.

Wet brakes may cause the car to pull

to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes

lightly until the braking action returns to

normal, taking care to keep the car

under control at all times. If the braking

action does not return to normal, stop

as soon as it is safe to do so and we

recommend that you call an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

• Do not coast down hills with the car out

of gear. This is extremely hazardous.

Keep the car in gear at all times, use

the brakes to slow down, then shift to a

lower gear so that engine braking will

help you maintain a safe speed.

WARNING

Never press the ESC OFF button

whilst ESC is operating.

If the ESC is turned off whilst ESC

is operating, the vehicle may go out

of control.

To turn ESC off whilst driving,

press the ESC OFF button whilst

driving on a flat road surface.

WARNING

• Whenever leaving vehicle or

parking, always set the parking

brake as far as possible and fully

engage the vehicle's transmis-

sion into the park position.

Vehicles not fully engaged in park

with the parking brake set are at

risk for moving inadvertently and

injuring yourself or others.

• All vehicles should always have

the parking brake fully engaged

when parking to avoid inadver-

tent movement of the car which

can injure occupants or pedestri-

ans.

527

Driving your vehicle

• Do not "ride" the brake pedal. Resting

your foot on the brake pedal whilst driv-

ing can be dangerous because it can

result in the brakes overheating and

losing their effectiveness. It also

increases the wear of the brake com-

ponents.

• If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving,

apply the brakes gently and keep the

car pointed straight ahead whilst you

slow down. When you are moving

slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,

pull off the road and stop in a safe

place.

• If your car is equipped with an auto-

matic transmission, don't let your car

creep forward. To avoid creeping for-

ward, keep your foot firmly on the

brake pedal when the car is stopped.

• Use caution when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake and

place the gear selector lever in P (auto-

matic transmission) or in first or

reverse gear (manual transmission). If

your car is facing downhill, turn the

front wheels into the kerb to help keep

the car from rolling. If your car is facing

uphill, turn the front wheels away from

the kerb to help keep the car from

rolling. If there is no kerb or if it is

required by other conditions to keep

the car from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged posi-

tion. This is most likely to happen when

there is an accumulation of snow or ice

around or near the rear brakes or if the

brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the

parking brake may freeze, apply it only

temporarily whilst you put the gear

selector lever in P (automatic transmis-

sion) or in first or reverse gear (manu-

al transmission) and block the rear

wheels so the car cannot roll. Then

release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade

with the accelerator pedal. This can

cause the transmission to overheat.

Always use the brake pedal or parking

brake.

Driving your vehicle

285

E080000ATQ-EA

Wagon/Van (If equipped)

A locking differential, if equipped, is for

the rear wheel differential only. The fea-

tures of this locking differential are

described below:

Just as with a conventional differential,

the wheel on one side is allowed to turn

at a different speed from the wheel on

the other side when the vehicle is cor-

nering. The difference between the lock-

ing differential and a conventional differ-

ential is that if the wheel on one side of

the vehicle loses traction, a greater

amount of torque is applied to the rear

wheel on the other side to improve trac-

tion.

✽

NOTICE

In a stationary position, the LD

(Locking Differential) will operate when

the difference of the revolution speed

between the rear right wheel and the

rear left wheel occurs.

The following procedures can be used to

confirm that the locking differential is

functioning properly:

(1) Position the vehicle so that one wheel

is on a dry paved surface and the

other on ice, snow, mud, etc. Drive

the vehicle, and observe the opera-

tion of the locking differential. The

vehicle should not become stuck if

the differential is functioning properly.

(2) Depress the accelerator pedal gradu-

ally, and then when traction is good,

depress it forcefully. If the vehicle

accelerates well, the differential is

functioning properly.

✽

NOTICE

Usually a locking differential will oper-

ate and release automatically but occa-

sionally it may not release automatically.

At this time you will feel the tyre is

dragged when you are driving or corner-

ing. You can release it manually by slight-

ly turning the steering wheel right and

left whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.

LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION

• Never start the engine with the

gearshift lever placed in the for-

ward or reverse whilst one of the

rear wheels is jacked up and the

other in contact with the ground;

doing so may cause the vehicle to

jump forward.

• If one of the rear wheels begins to

spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehi-

cle can sometimes be driven out

by depressing the accelerator

pedal further; however, avoid run-

ning the engine continuously at

high rpm because doing so could

damage the locking differential.

529

Driving your vehicle

E100000AFD-EA

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends

mainly on your style of driving, where you

drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many

kilometers (miles) you can get from a litre

(gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehicle

as economically as possible, use the fol-

lowing driving suggestions to help save

money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate. Don't make “kangaroo” starts

or full-throttle shifts and maintain a

steady cruising speed. Don't race

between stoplights. Try to adjust your

speed to that of the other traffic so you

don't have to change speeds unneces-

sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever

possible. Always maintain a safe dis-

tance from other vehicles so you can

avoid unnecessary braking. This also

reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster

you drive, the more fuel your car uses.

Driving at a moderate speed, especial-

ly on the highway, is one of the most

effective ways to reduce fuel consump-

tion.

• Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.

This can increase fuel consumption

and also increase wear on these com-

ponents. In addition, driving with your

foot resting on the brake pedal may

cause the brakes to overheat, which

reduces their effectiveness and may

lead to more serious consequences.

• Take care of your tyres. Keep them

inflated to the recommended pressure.

Incorrect inflation, either too much or

too little, results in unnecessary tyre

wear. Check the tyre pressures at least

once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned

correctly. Improper alignment can

result from hitting kerbs or driving too

fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-

ment causes faster tyre wear and may

also result in other problems as well as

greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your car in good condition. For

better fuel economy and reduced

maintenance costs, maintain your car

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in Section 7. If you drive your

car in severe conditions, more frequent

maintenance is required (see Section

7 for details).

• Keep your car clean. For maximum

service, your vehicle should be kept

clean and free of corrosive materials. It

is especially important that mud, dirt,

ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate

on the underside of the car. This extra

weight can result in increased fuel con-

sumption and also contribute to corro-

sion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary

weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel

economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than

necessary. If you are waiting (and not

in traffic), turn off your engine and

restart only when you're ready to go.

• Remember, your vehicle does not

require extended warm-up. After the

engine has started, allow the engine to

run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-

ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold

weather, however, give your engine a

slightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't “labour” or “over-rev” the engine.

Labouring is driving too slowly in too

high a gear resulting in the engine

bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower

gear. Over-revving is racing the engine

beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-

ed by shifting at the recommended

speeds.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

Driving your vehicle

305

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.

The air conditioning system is operat-

ed by engine power so your fuel econ-

omy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can

reduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds

and headwinds. To help offset some of

this loss, slow down when driving in

these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-

dition is important both for economy and

safety. Therefore, we recommend that the

system be serviced by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Engine off dur-

ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coast

down hills or anytime the vehicle is

in motion. The power steering and

power brakes will not function

properly without the engine run-

ning. Instead, keep the engine on

and downshift to an appropriate

gear for engine braking effect. In

addition, turning off the ignition

whilst driving could engage the

steering wheel lock resulting in

loss of vehicle steering which

could cause serious injury or

death.

531

Driving your vehicle

E110100AUN-EA

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are

encountered such as water, snow, ice,

mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow

these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.

• Avoid sudden movements in braking or

steering.

• When braking with non-ABS brakes

pump the brake pedal with a light up-

and-down motion until the vehicle is

stopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use

second gear. Accelerate slowly to

avoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or

other non-slip material under the drive

wheels to provide traction when stalled

in ice, snow, or mud.

E110200ATQ-EA

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to

free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn

the steering wheel right and left to clear

the area around your front wheels. Then,

shift back and forth between 1st (First)

and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped

with a manual transmission or R

(Reverse) and any forward gear in vehi-

cles equipped with an automatic trans-

mission. Do not race the engine, and

spin the wheels as little as possible. If

you are still stuck after a few tries, have

the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to

avoid engine overheating and possible

damage to the transmission.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may cause

engine over-heating, transmission

damage or failure, and tyre damage.

WARNING - Downshifting

Downshifting with an automatic

transmission, whilst driving on

slippery surfaces can cause an

accident. The sudden change in

tyre speed could cause the tyres to

skid. Be careful when downshifting

on slippery surfaces.

WARNING - ABS

Do not pump the brake pedal on a

vehicle equipped with ABS.

Driving your vehicle

325

✽

NOTICE

The ESC system (if equipped) should be

turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

E110300AUN-EA

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-

ners, especially when roads are wet.

Ideally, corners should always be taken

under gentle acceleration. If you follow

these suggestions, tyre wear will be held

to a minimum.

E110400AUN

Driving at night

Because night driving presents more

hazards than driving in the daylight, here

are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as it

may be more difficult to see at night,

especially in areas where there may

not be any street lights.

WARNING - Spinning tyres

Do not spin the wheels, especially

at speeds more than 56 km/h (35

mph). Spinning the wheels at high

speeds when the vehicle is station-

ary could cause a tyre to overheat

which could result in tyre damage

that may injure bystanders.

OTQ056051/H OCM053010

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward of backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

533

Driving your vehicle

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare

from other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-

erly aimed on vehicles not equipped

with the automatic headlight aiming

feature. Dirty or improperly aimed

headlights will make it much more diffi-

cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlights

of oncoming vehicles. You could be

temporarily blinded, and it will take

several seconds for your eyes to read-

just to the darkness.

E110500AUN-EA

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-

pared for the slick pavement. Here are a

few things to consider when driving in the

rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distance

needed to stop your vehicle, so slow

down.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-

ment in good shape. Replace your

windshield wiper blades when they

show signs of streaking or missing

areas on the windshield.

• If your tyres are not in good condition,

making a quick stop on wet pavement

can cause a skid and possibly lead to

an accident. Be sure your tyres are in

good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-

ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles

can affect your brakes. If you must go

through puddles, try to drive through

them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gotten

your brakes wet, apply them lightly

whilst driving until normal braking

operation returns.

1TQA3003/H

Driving your vehicle

345

E110600AUN

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no high-

er than the bottom of the wheel hub.

Drive through any water slowly. Allow

adequate stopping distance because

brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them several

times whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.

Driving off-road

Drive carefully off-road because your

vehicle may be damaged by rocks or

roots of trees. Become familiar with the

off-road conditions where you are going

to drive before you begin driving.

E110700AUN-EA

Highway driving

Tyres:

Adjust the tyre inflation pressures to

specification. Low tyre inflation pressures

will result in overheating and possible

failure of the tyres.

Avoid using worn or damaged tyres

which may result in reduced traction or

tyre failure.

✽

NOTICE

Never exceed the maximum tyre infla-

tion pressure shown on the tyres.

1TQA1004R

WARNING

• Underinflated or overinflated

tyres can cause poor handling,

loss of vehicle control, and sud-

den tyre failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and even death.

Always check the tyres for proper

inflation before driving. For prop-

er tyre pressures, refer to section

9, “Tyres and wheels”.

• Driving on tyres with no or insuf-

ficient tread is dangerous. Worn-

out tyres can result in loss of

vehicle control, collisions, injury,

and even death. Worn-out tyres

should be replaced as soon as

possible and should never be

used for driving. Always check

the tyre tread before driving your

car. For further information and

tread limits, refer to section 7,

“Tyres and wheels”.

535

Driving your vehicle

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:

High speed travel consumes more fuel

than urban motoring. Do not forget to

check both engine coolant and engine

oil.

Drive belt:

A loose or damaged drive belt may result

in overheating of the engine.

E111000AEN-EA

Reducing the risk of a rollover

(MPV)

Multi-purpose Passenger Vehicle have a

higher ground clearance and a narrower

track to make them capable of perform-

ing in a wide variety of applications.

Specific design characteristics give them

a higher centre of gravity than ordinary

cars. An advantage of the higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road,

which allows you to anticipate problems.

They are not designed for cornering at

the same speeds as conventional pas-

senger drive vehicles, any more than

low-slung sports cars are designed to

perform satisfactorily in certain condi-

tions. Due to this risk, the driver and pas-

sengers are strongly recommended to

buckle their seat belts. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted person is more likely to die

than a person wearing a seat belt. There

are steps that a driver can make to

reduce the risk of a rollover. If at all pos-

sible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt

manoeuvres, do not load your roof rack

with heavy cargo, and never modify your

vehicle in any way.

WARNING - Rollover

As with other Multi-purpose

Passenger Vehicles (MPV), failure

to operate the vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control, resulting in

an accident or rollover.

• Utility vehicles have a significant-

ly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles.

• Specific design characteristics

(higher ground clearance, nar-

rower track, etc.) give this vehicle

a higher centre of gravity than

ordinary cars.

• A MPV is not designed for cor-

nering at the same speeds as

conventional vehicles.

• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt

manoeuvres.

• In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more like-

ly to die than a person wearing a

seat belt. Make sure everyone in

the vehicle is properly buckled

up.

Driving your vehicle

365

E120000AUN-EA

The more severe weather conditions of

winter result in greater wear and other

problems. To minimise the problems of

winter driving, you should follow these

suggestions:

E120100AUN-EA

Snowy or Icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may

be necessary to use snow tyres or to

install tyre chains on your tyres. If snow

tyres are needed, it is necessary to

select tyres equivalent in size and type of

the original equipment tyres. Failure to do

so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your car. Furthermore,

speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden

brake applications, and sharp turns are

potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking

to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-

cations on snowy or icy roads may cause

skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-

cient distance between the vehicle in

operation in front and your vehicle. Also,

apply the brake gently. It should be noted

that installing tyre chains on the tyre will

provide a greater driving force, but will

not prevent side skids.

✽

NOTICE

Tire chains are not legal in all countries.

Check the country laws before fitting

tire chains.

E120101AUN-EA

Snow tyres

If you mount snow tyres on your vehicle,

make sure they are radial tyres of the

same size and load range as the original

tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four

wheels to balance your vehicle’s han-

dling in all weather conditions. Keep in

mind that the traction provided by snow

tyres on dry roads may not be as high as

your vehicle's original equipment tyres.

You should drive cautiously even when

the roads are clear. Check with the tyre

dealer for maximum speed recommen-

dations.

Do not install studded tyres without first

checking local, state and municipal regu-

lations for possible restrictions against

their use.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tyre size

Snow tyres should be equivalent in

size and type to the vehicle's stan-

dard tyres. Otherwise, the safety

and handling of your vehicle may

be adversely affected.

1TQA3005

537

Driving your vehicle

E120102ATQ-EA

Tyre chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are

thinner, they can be damaged by mount-

ing some types of snow chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tyres is rec-

ommended instead of snow chains. Do

not mount tyre chains on vehicles

equipped with aluminium wheels; snow

chains may cause damage to the wheels.

If snow chains must be used, use wire-

type chains with a thickness of less than

15 mm (0.59 in). Damage to your vehicle

caused by improper snow chain use is

not covered by your vehicle manufactur-

ers warranty.

When using tyre chains, attach them to

the rear tyres.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manu-

facturer's instructions and mount them as

tightly as you can. Drive slowly with

chains installed. If you hear the chains

contacting the body or chassis, stop and

tighten them. If they still make contact,

slow down until it stops. Remove the

chains as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

CAUTION

• Make sure the snow chains are

the correct size and type for your

tyres. Incorrect snow chains can

cause damage to the vehicle body

and suspension and may not be

covered by your vehicle manufac-

turer warranty. Also, the snow

chain connecting hooks may be

damaged from contacting vehicle

components causing the snow

chains to come loose from the

tyre. Make sure the snow chains

are SAE class “S” certified.

• Always check chain installation

for proper mounting after driving

approximately 0.5 to 1 km (0.3 to

0.6 miles) to ensure safe mount-

ing. Retighten or remount the

chains if they are loose.

WARNING

- Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away

from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning flashers and place

a triangular emergency warning

device behind the vehicle if avail-

able. Always place the vehicle in P

(Park), apply the parking brake and

turn off the engine before installing

snow chains.

OTQ057011

Driving your vehicle

385

E120200AUN

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality

ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling

system. It is the only type of coolant that

should be used because it helps prevent

corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-

cates the water pump and prevents

freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish

your coolant in accordance with the

maintenance schedule in section 7.

Before winter, have your coolant tested to

assure that its freezing point is sufficient

for the temperatures anticipated during

the winter.

E120300AEN-EA

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the

battery system. Visually inspect the bat-

tery and cables as described in section

7. The level of charge in your battery can

be checked by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer or a service station.

E120400AEN-EA

Change to "winter weight" oil if

necessary

In some climates it is recommended that

a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be

used during cold weather. See section 9

for recommendations. If you aren't sure

what weight oil you should use, we rec-

ommend that you consult an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

E120500AUN

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect your spark plugs as described in

section 7 and replace them if necessary.

Also check all ignition wiring and compo-

nents to be sure they are not cracked,

worn or damaged in any way.

E120600AUN-EA

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an

approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into

the key opening. If a lock is covered with

ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing

fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is

frozen internally, you may be able to thaw

it out by using a heated key. Handle the

heated key with care to avoid injury.

WARNING - Tyre chains

• The use of chains may adversely

affect vehicle handling.

• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph)

or the chain manufacturer’s rec-

ommended speed limit, whichev-

er is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,

holes, sharp turns, and other

road hazards, which may cause

the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-

wheel braking.

CAUTION

• Chains that are the wrong size or

improperly installed can damage

your vehicle's brake lines, sus-

pension, body and wheels.

• Stop driving and retighten the

chains any time you hear them

hitting the vehicle.

539

Driving your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

The operating temperature range for an

immobiliser key is between -40°C to

80°C. If you heat an immobiliser key

above 80°C to open a frozen lock, you

may damage the transponder located in

the head of the key.

E120700AEN-EA

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer

system from freezing, add an approved

window washer anti-freeze solution in

accordance with instructions on the con-

tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is

available from an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do

not use engine coolant or other types of

anti-freeze as these may damage the

paint finish.

E120800AUN

Don't let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged position.

This is most likely to happen when there

is an accumulation of snow or ice around

or near the rear brakes or if the brakes

are wet. If there is a risk the parking

brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-

ily whilst you put the gear selector lever

in P (automatic transmission) or in first or

reverse gear (manual transmission) and

block the rear wheels so the car cannot

roll. Then release the parking brake.

E120900AUN

Don't let ice and snow accumu-

late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice

can build up under the fenders and inter-

fere with the steering. When driving in

severe winter conditions where this may

happen, you should periodically check

underneath the car to be sure the move-

ment of the front wheels and the steering

components is not obstructed.

E121000AUN-EA

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weath-

er where you drive your car, you should

carry appropriate emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to carry

include tyre chains, tow straps or chains,

flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a

shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,

gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,

etc.

Don't place foreign objects or

materials in the engine compart-

ment

Placement of foreign objects or materials

which prevent cooling of the engine, in

the engine compartment, may cause a

failure or combustion. The manufacturer

is not responsible for the damage caused

by such placement.

Driving your vehicle

405

E140000AFD-EA

If you are considering towing with your

car, you should first check with your

country's Department of Motor Vehicles

to determine their legal requirements.

Since laws vary the requirements for tow-

ing trailers, cars, or other types of vehi-

cles or apparatus may differ. We recom-

mend that you ask an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify

what the vehicle trailering capacity is for

your vehicle, you should read the infor-

mation in “Weight of the trailer” that

appears later in this section.

Remember that trailering is different than

just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in handling,

durability, and fuel economy. Successful,

safe trailering requires correct equip-

ment, and it has to be used properly.

This section contains many time-tested,

important trailering tips and safety rules.

Many of these are important for your

safety and that of your passengers.

Please read this section carefully before

you pull a trailer.

\Load-pulling components such as the

engine, transmission, wheel assemblies,

and tyres are forced to work harder

against the load of the added weight.

The engine is required to operate at rela-

tively higher speeds and under greater

loads. This additional burden generates

extra heat. The trailer also adds consid-

erably to wind resistance, increasing the

pulling requirements.

E140100AUN-EA

Towbars

It's important to have the correct towbar

equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks

going by, and rough roads are a few rea-

sons why you’ll need the right towbar.

Here are some rules to follow:

• Will you have to make any holes in the

body of your vehicle when you install a

trailer towbar? If you do, then be sure

to seal the holes later when you

remove the towbar.

If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon

monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can

get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and

water.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are not

intended for towbars. Do not attach

rental towbars or other bumper-type

towbars to them. Use only a frame-

mounted towbar that does not attach to

the bumper.

TRAILER TOWING

CAUTION

Pulling a trailer improperly can

damage your vehicle and result in

costly repairs not covered by your

warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,

follow the advice in this section.

WARNING - Towing a trail-

If you don't use the correct equip-

ment and drive improperly, you can

lose control when you pull a trailer.

For example, if the trailer is too

heavy, the brakes may not work

well - or even at all. You and your

passengers could be seriously or

fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if

you have followed all the steps in

this section.

WARNING - Weight limits

Before towing, make sure the total

trailer weight, gross combination

weight, gross vehicle weight, gross

axle weight and trailer tongue load

are all within the limits.

541

Driving your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

We recommend only genuine

HYUNDAI towbars (the towbars are

made and tested in Australia/NZ for

local conditions).

E140200AUN-EA

Safety chains

You should always attach chains

between your vehicle and your trailer.

Cross the safety chains under the tongue

of the trailer so that the tongue will not

drop to the road if it becomes separated

from the towbar.

Instructions about safety chains may be

provided by the towbar manufacturer or

by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the

manufacturer’s recommendation for

attaching safety chains. Always leave just

enough slack so you can turn with your

trailer. And, never allow safety chains to

drag on the ground.

E140300AUN

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking

system, make sure it conforms to your

country’s regulations and that it is prop-

erly installed and operating correctly.

If your trailer weighs more than the max-

imum trailer weight without trailer brakes

loaded, then it needs its own brakes and

they must be adequate. Be sure to read

and follow the instructions for the trailer

brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust

and maintain them properly.

• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-

tem.

E140400AUN-EA

Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain

amount of experience. Before setting out

for the open road, you must get to know

your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the

feel of handling and braking with the

added weight of the trailer. And always

keep in mind that the vehicle you are

driving is now a good deal longer and not

nearly so responsive as your vehicle is

by itself. Before you start, check the trail-

er towbar and platform, safety chains,

electrical connector(s), lights, tyres and

mirror adjustment. If the trailer has elec-

tric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer

moving and then apply the trailer brake

controller by hand to be sure the brakes

are working. This lets you check your

electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be

sure that the load is secure, and that the

lights and any trailer brakes are still work-

ing.

E140401AUN

Following distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-

cle ahead as you would when driving

your vehicle without a trailer. This can

help you avoid situations that require

heavy braking and sudden turns.

WARNING - Trailer brakes

Do not use a trailer with its own

brakes unless you are absolutely

certain that you have properly set

up the brake system. This is not a

task for amateurs. Use an experi-

enced, competent trailer shop for

this work.

Driving your vehicle

425

E140402AUN-EA

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up

ahead when you’re towing a trailer. Due

to the increased vehicle length, you’ll

need to go much farther beyond the

passed vehicle before you can return to

your lane.

E140403AUN

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel

with one hand. Then, to move the trailer

to the left, just move your hand to the left.

To move the trailer to the right, move your

hand to the right. Always back up slowly

and, if possible, have someone guide

you.

E140404AUN-EA

Making turns

When you’re turning with a trailer, make

wider turns than normal. Do this so your

trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, kerbs,

road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid

jerky or sudden manoeuvres. Signal well

in advance.

E140405AFD-EA

Turn signals when towing a trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has

to have a different turn signal flasher and

extra wiring. The green arrows on your

instrument panel will flash whenever you

signal a turn or lane change. Properly

connected, the trailer lights will also flash

to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,

change lanes, or stop. When towing a

trailer, the green arrows on your instru-

ment panel will flash for turns even if the

bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus,

you may think drivers behind you are

seeing your signals when, in fact, they

are not. It’s important to check occasion-

ally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still

working. You must also check the lights

every time you disconnect and then

reconnect the wires. Do not connect a

trailer lighting system directly to your

vehicle’s lighting system. Use only an

approved trailer wiring harness.

An authorised HYUNDAI dealer can

assist you in installing the wiring har-

ness.

E140406ATQ-EA

Driving on grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear

before you start down a long or steep

downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you

might have to use your brakes so much

that they would get hot and no longer

operate efficiently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and

reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45

mph) to reduce the possibility of engine

and transmission overheating.

If your trailer weighs more than the max-

imum trailer weight without trailer brakes

and you have an automatic transmission,

you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-

ing a trailer.

Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when

towing a trailer will minimise heat build up

and extend the life of your transmission.

WARNING

Failure to use an approved trailer

wiring harness could result in dam-

age to the vehicle electrical system

and/or personal injury.

543

Driving your vehicle

E140407BUN

Parking on hills

Generally, you should not park your vehi-

cle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.

People can be seriously injured or cause

fatality, and both your vehicle and the

trailer can be damaged if they begin a

downhill trajectory.

However, if you ever have to park your

trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:

1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.

Turn the steering wheel in the direction

of the curb (right if headed down hill,

left if headed up hill).

2. If the vehicle has a manual transmis-

sion, place the car in neutral. If the

vehicle has an automatic transmission,

place the car in P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake and shut off the

vehicle.

4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels

on the down hill side of the wheels.

5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift

to neutral, release the parking brake

and slowly release the brakes until the

trailer chocks absorb the load.

6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-

ing brake and shift the vehicle to R

(Reverse) for manual transmission or

P (Park) automatic transmission.

7. Shut off the vehicle and release the

vehicle brakes but leave the parking

brake set.

CAUTION

• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) pay

close attention to the engine

coolant temperature gauge to

ensure the engine does not over-

heat.

If the needle of the coolant tem-

perature gauge moves across the

dial towards “H” (HOT), pull over

and stop as soon as it is safe to

do so, and allow the engine to idle

until it cools down. You may pro-

ceed once the engine has cooled

sufficiently.

• You must decide driving speed

depending on trailer weight and

uphill grade to reduce the possi-

bility of engine and transmission

overheating.

CAUTION

Going uphill under hot ambient

temperature (above 35°C) with GVW

and/or trailer, a minimal fuel tank

level of 5 litre has to be assured in

order to prevent power limitation

due to fuel overheating as well as

further damages in the fuel injec-

tion equipment.

WARNING - Parking on a

hill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with a

trailer attached could cause seri-

ous injury or death, should the trail-

er break lose.

WARNING - Parking brake

It can be dangerous to get out of

your vehicle if the parking brake is

not firmly set.

If you have left the engine running,

the vehicle can move suddenly. You

or others could be seriously or

fatally injured.

Driving your vehicle

445

When you are ready to leave after park-

ing on a hill

1. With the manual transmission in

Neutral or automatic transmission in P

(Park), apply your brakes and hold the

brake pedal down whilst you:

• Start your engine;

• Shift into gear; and

• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from the

brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of

the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and

store the chocks.

E140500AUN-EA

Maintenance when trailer towing

Your vehicle will need service more often

when you regularly towing a trailer.

Important items to pay particular atten-

tion to include engine oil, automatic

transmission fluid, axle lubricant and

cooling system fluid. Brake condition is

another important item to check fre-

quently. Each item is covered in this man-

ual, and the Index will help you find them

quickly. If you’re towing, it’s a good idea

to review these sections before you start

your trip. Don’t forget to also maintain

your trailer and towbar.

Follow the maintenance schedule that

accompanied your trailer and check it

periodically. Preferably, conduct the

check at the start of each day’s driving.

Most importantly, all towbar nuts and

bolts should be tight.

CAUTION

• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occur

in hot days or during uphill driv-

ing. If the coolant gauge indicates

over-heating, switch off the A/C

and stop the vehicle in a safe area

to cool down the engine.

• When towing check transmission

fluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equipped

with the air conditioner, you

should install a condenser fan to

improve engine performance

when towing a trailer.

545

Driving your vehicle

If you do decide to pull a trailer

(For Australia)

Here are some important points if you

decide to pull a trailer:

• Do not do any towing with your car dur-

ing its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in

order to allow the engine to properly

run in. Failure to heed this caution may

result in serious engine or transaxle

damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-

sult an authorised HYUNDAI dealer for

further information on additional

requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-

ate speed (less than 100 km/h (60

mph)).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed

70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted speed

limit, whichever is lower.

WARNING

HYUNDAI DO NOT recommend the use of load levelling devices of any type.

The use of a load levelling devices may place undue stress on the chassis

causing chassis or mounting point failure.

Towing Trailer

The recommended towing capacity of this vehicle will be provided with the Genuine

HYUNDAI Approved Tow Bar, which will meet the requirements of Australian

Standard: AS 4177.

For further information with regard to trailer towing:

• on Genuine HYUNDAI parts and accessories (including the Genuine HYUNDAI

Approved Tow Bar and its availability for purchase) please consult your nearest

authorised HYUNDAI dealer or visit www

.hyundai.com.au.

• on Rules and Regulations please consult your State or Territory road authorities.

It is the owner's responsibility to ensure that any tow bar used is compatible with and

suitable for your vehicle, and is within the towing capacity of your vehicle. Your

HYUNDAI vehicle should not be used to tow heavy loads as it is not designed for

such use.

Subject to applicable law, HYUNDAI Motor Company Australia Pty Ltd shall not be

liable for any losses, damages, costs, expenses (including but not limited to conse-

quential and indirect losses, personal injury and deaths) caused by towing which is

not in compliance with the instructions set out in this owner's manual and under rel-

evant law, rules and regulation.

Driving your vehicle

465

If you do decide to pull a trailer

(For New Zealand)

Here are some important points if you

decide to pull a trailer:

• Do not do any towing with your car dur-

ing its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in

order to allow the engine to properly

run in. Failure to heed this caution may

result in serious engine or transaxle

damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-

sult an authorised HYUNDAI dealer for

further information on additional

requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-

ate speed (less than 100 km/h (60

mph)).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed

70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted speed

limit, whichever is lower.

owing Capacity Note

The recommended towing capacity of this vehicle will be provided with the Genuine

HYUNDAI Approved Tow Bar.

• To enquire about the towing capacity of this vehicle, please visit

www

.hyundai.co.nz, or call us on 0800 HYUNDAI.

• To enquire about Genuine HYUNDAI parts and accessories (including the

Genuine HYUNDAI Approved Tow Bar and its availability for purchase) please con-

sult your nearest authorised HYUNDAI dealer/service agent, call us on 0800

HYUNDAI or visit www

.hyundai.co.nz.

It is the owner's responsibility to ensure that any tow bar used is compatible with and

suitable for their vehicle, and is within the towing capacity of their vehicle. Your

HYUNDAI vehicle should not be used to tow heavy loads beyond the recommended

towing capacities displayed on www.hyundai.co.nz as it is not designed for such use.

Subject to applicable law, HYUNDAI Motors New Zealand Ltd shall not be liable for

any losses, damages, costs, expenses (including but not limited to consequential and

indirect losses, personal injury and deaths) caused by towing which is not in compli-

ance with instructions set out in the owner's manual.

WARNING

HYUNDAI DO NOT recommend the use of load levelling devices of any type.

The use of a load levelling devices may place undue stress on the chassis

causing chassis or mounting point failure.

547

Driving your vehicle

E140601AUN

Weight of the trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be? It

should never weigh more than the maxi-

mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But

even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your

trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road

grades, outside temperature and how

often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer

are all important. The ideal trailer weight

can also depend on any special equip-

ment that you have on your vehicle.

E140602AEN-EA

Weight of the trailer tongue

The tongue load of any trailer is an

important weight to measure because it

affects the total gross vehicle weight

(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight

includes the kerb weight of the vehicle,

any cargo you may carry in it, and the

people who will be riding in the vehicle.

And if you will tow a trailer, you must add

the tongue load to the GVW because

your vehicle will also be carrying that

weight.

The trailer tongue should weigh within

the limits of the maximum trailer tongue

load permissible. After you've loaded

your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the

tongue, separately, to see if the weights

are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able

to correct them simply by moving some

items around in the trailer.

Tongue loads can be increased or

decreased by redistributing the load in

the trailer. This can be verified by check-

ing the total weight of the loaded trailer

and then checking the load on the

tongue.

WARNING - Trailer

• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in the

front. The front should be loaded

with approximately 60% of the

total trailer load; the rear should

be loaded with approximately

40% of the total trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximum

weight limits of the trailer or trail-

er towing equipment. Improper

loading can result in damage to

your vehicle and/or personal

injury. Check weights and loading

at a commercial scale or highway

patrol office equipped with scales.

• An improperly loaded trailer can

cause loss of vehicle control.

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight

Gross Vehicle Weight

C190E01JM

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

Driving your vehicle

485

E160000AUN-EA

This section will guide you in the proper

loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to

keep your loaded vehicle weight within its

design rating capability, with or without a

trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will

provide maximum return of the vehicle

design performance. Before loading your

vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-

lowing terms for determining your vehi-

cle's weight ratings, with or without a

trailer, from the vehicle's specifications

and the certification label:

E160100AUN-EA

Base kerb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including

a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-

ment. It does not include passengers,

cargo, or optional equipment.

E160200AUN-EA

Vehicle kerb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your dealer

plus any aftermarket equipment.

E160300AUN-EA

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added to

the Base Kerb Weight, including cargo

and optional equipment.

E160400AUN-EA

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each

axle (front and rear) - including vehicle

kerb weight and all payload.

E160500AUN-EA

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight

that can be carried by a single axle (front

or rear). These numbers are shown on

the certification label.

The total load on each axle must never

exceed its GAWR.

E160600AUN-EA

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Kerb Weight plus actual

Cargo Weight plus passengers.

E160700AUN-EA

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of

the fully loaded vehicle (including all

options, equipment, passengers and

cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-

tification label.

E160800AUN-EA

Overloading

VEHICLE WEIGHT

WARNING - Vehicle weight

The gross axle weight rating

(GAWR) and the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-

cle are on the certification label.

Exceeding these ratings can cause

an accident or vehicle damage. You

can calculate the weight of your

load by weighing the items (and

people) before putting them in the

vehicle. Be careful not to overload

your vehicle.

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency whilst driving / 6-2

If the engine will not start / 6-3

Emergency starting / 6-4

If the engine overheats / 6-6

If you have a flat tyre / 6-7

Towing / 6-14

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

F010100AUN-EA

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a

warning to other drivers to exercise

extreme caution when approaching,

overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency

repairs are being made or when the vehi-

cle is stopped near the edge of a road-

way.

Depress the flasher switch with the igni-

tion switch in any position. The flasher

switch is located in the centre console

switch panel. All turn signal lights will

flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates

whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the

hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using the

hazard warning flasher whilst the vehi-

cle is being towed.

F020100AUN

If the engine stalls at a crossroad

or crossing

• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, set the shift lever in the

N(Neutral) position and then push the

vehicle to a safe place.

• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle

not equipped with the ignition lock

switch, the vehicle can move forward

by shifting to the 2 (second) or 3 (third)

gear and then turning the starter with-

out depressing the clutch pedal.

F020100AUN-EA

If you have a flat tyre whilst driv-

ing

If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving:

1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

and let the car slow down whilst driving

straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes

immediately or attempt to pull off the

road as this may cause a loss of con-

trol. When the car has slowed to such

a speed that it is safe to do so, brake

carefully and pull off the road. Drive off

the road as far as possible and park on

firm, level ground. If you are on a divid-

ed highway, do not park in the median

area between the two traffic lanes.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

WHILST DRIVING

OTQ067001R

What to do in an emergency

2.When the car is stopped, turn on your

emergency hazard flashers, set the

parking brake and put the transmission

in P (automatic transmission) or

reverse (manual transmission).

3.Have all passengers get out of the car.

Be sure they all get out on the side of

the car that is away from traffic.

4.When changing a flat tyre, follow the

instruction provided later in this sec-

tion.

F020300AEN-EA

If engine stalls whilst driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle does not start, we recommend

that you consult an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

F030100AUN

If engine doesn't turn over or

turns over slowly

1. If your car has an automatic transmis-

sion, be sure the gear selector lever is

in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the

emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be

sure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate the

starter, the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be

sure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start

it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

F030200AEN-EA

If engine turns over normally but

does not start

1. Check fuel level.

2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK

position, check all connectors at the

ignition coils and spark plugs.

Reconnect any that may be discon-

nected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-

partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, we

recommend that you call an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

WARNING

If the engine will not start, do not

push or pull the car to start it. This

could result in a collision or cause

other damage. In addition, push or

pull starting may cause the catalyt-

ic converter to be overloaded and

create a fire hazard.

What to do in an emergency

EMERGENCY STARTING

F040000AUN

Connect cables in numerical order and

disconnect in reverse order.

F040100BEN

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done

incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to

yourself or damage to your vehicle or

battery, follow the jump starting proce-

dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-

mend that you have a competent techni-

cian or towing service jump start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Use only a 12-volt jumper system.

You can damage a 12-volt starting

motor, ignition system, and other

electrical parts beyond repair by

use of a 24-volt power supply (either

two 12-volt batteries in series or a

24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-

duces hydrogen gas which may

explode if exposed to flame or

sparks.

If these instructions are not fol-

lowed exactly, serious personal

injury and damage to the vehicle

may occur! If you are not sure

how to follow this procedure,

seek qualified assistance.

Automobile batteries contain sul-

furic acid. This is poisonous and

highly corrosive. When jump

starting, wear protective glasses

and be careful not to get acid on

yourself, your clothing or on the

car.

• Do not attempt to jump start the

vehicle if the discharged battery

is frozen or if the electrolyte level

is low; the battery may rupture or

explode.

• Do not allow the (+) and (-)

jumper cables to touch. It may

cause sparks.

• The battery may rupture or

explode when you jump start with

a low or frozen battery.

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the elec-

trolyte level of the battery as this

may cause the battery to rupture or

explode causing serious injury.

1VQA4001

Discharged

battery

Jumper Cables

Booster

battery

(-)

(+)

(-)

What to do in an emergency

F040101AEN-EA

Jump starting procedure

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical

loads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact

sequence shown in the illustration.

First connect one end of a jumper

cable to the positive terminal of the

discharged battery (1), then connect

the other end to the positive terminal

on the booster battery (2).

Proceed to connect one end of the

other jumper cable to the negative ter-

minal of the booster battery (3), then

the other end to a solid, stationary,

metallic point (for example, the engine

lifting bracket) away from the battery

(4). Do not connect it to or near any

part that moves when the engine is

cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-

tact anything except the correct battery

terminals or the correct ground. Do not

lean over the battery when making

connections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and let it run at 2,000

rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-

cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent, we recommend that the

system be checked by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

F040200AUN

Push-starting

Your manual transmission-equipped

vehicle should not be push-started

because it might damage the emission

control system.

Vehicles equipped with automatic trans-

mission cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for

jump-starting.

CAUTION - Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable

from the negative terminal of the

booster battery to the negative ter-

minal of the discharged battery.

This can cause the discharged bat-

tery to overheat and crack, releas-

ing battery acid.

WARNING

Never tow a vehicle to start it

because the sudden surge forward

when the engine starts could cause

a collision with the tow vehicle.

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

F050000AFD-EA

If your temperature gauge indicates over-

heating, you experience a loss of power,

or hear loud pinging or knocking, the

engine is probably too hot. If this hap-

pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it

is safe to do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in P

(automatic transmission) or neutral

(manual transmission) and set the

parking brake. If the air conditioning is

on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under

the car or steam is coming out from

the bonnet, stop the engine. Do not

open the bonnet until the coolant has

stopped running or the steaming has

stopped. If there is no visible loss of

engine coolant and no steam, leave

the engine running and check to be

sure the engine cooling fan is operat-

ing. If the fan is not running, turn the

engine off.

4. Whilst engine is switched off, check to

see if the water pump drive belt is

missing. If it is not missing, check to

see that it is tight. If the drive belt

seems to be satisfactory, check for

coolant leaking from the radiator,

hoses or under the car. (If the air con-

ditioning had been in use, it is normal

for cold water to be draining from it

when you stop).

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken

or engine coolant is leaking out, stop

the engine immediately and we recom-

mend that you call an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

6.If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine tem-

perature has returned to normal. Then,

if coolant has been lost, carefully add

coolant to the reservoir to bring the

fluid level in the reservoir up to the

halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for

further signs of overheating. If over-

heating happens again, we recom-

mend that you call an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

• Serious loss of coolant indicates

there is a leak in the cooling sys-

tem and we recommend that the

system be checked by an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

• When the engine overheats from

low engine coolant, suddenly

adding engine coolant may cause

cracks in the engine. To prevent

damage, add engine coolant

slowly in small quantities.

WARNING

Whilst the engine is running, keep

hair, hands and clothing away from

moving parts such as the fan and

drive belts to prevent injury.

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. This can

allow coolant to be blown out of the

opening and cause serious burns.

What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE

F070100ATQ-EA

Jack and tools

The jack and wheel brace (jack han-

dle) are stored in the storage com-

partment under the front driver’s

seat. Open the storage box cover to

reach the equipment.

(1) Jack

(2) Wheel brace

(Jack handle)

F070101BUN-EA

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency

tyre changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling”

whilst the vehicle is in motion, store it

properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce

the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing

tyres

• Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a public

road or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-

pletely off the road and onto

the shoulder before trying to

change a tyre. The jack should

be used on level firm ground.

If you cannot find a firm, level

place off the road, call a tow-

ing service company for

assistance.

• Be sure to use the correct

front and rear jacking posi-

tions on the vehicle; never

use the bumpers or any other

part of the vehicle for jacking

support.

(Continued)

OTQ067003 OTQ067017

What to do in an emergency

F070200AEN-EA

Removing and storing the spare

tyre

Your spare tyre is stored underneath

your vehicle, directly below the cargo

area.

To remove the spare tyre:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Find the plastic hex bolt cover and

remove the cover.

3. Use the wheel brace to loosen the

bolt enough to lower the spare

tyre.

Turn the wheel brace counter-

clockwise until the spare tyre

reaches the ground.

OTQ067004 OTQ067005

(Continued)

• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing serious

injury or death.

• Do not get under a vehicle

that is supported by a jack.

• Do not start or run the engine

whilst the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle whilst it is on

the jack.

• Make sure any children pres-

ent are in a secure place away

from the road and from the

vehicle to be raised with the

jack.

What to do in an emergency

4. After the spare tyre reaches the

ground, continue to turn the wheel

brace counterclockwise, and draw

the spare tyre outside. Never

rotate the wheel brace excessive-

ly, otherwise the spare tyre carrier

may be damaged.

5. Remove the retainer (1) from the

centre of the spare tyre.

To store the spare tyre:

1. Lay the tyre on the ground with the

valve stem facing up.

2. Place the wheel under the vehicle

and install the retainer (1) through

the wheel centre.

3. Turn the wheel brace clockwise

until it clicks.

F070300ATQ-EA

Changing tyres

1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.

2. Shift the shift lever into R

(Reverse) with manual transmis-

sion or P (Park) with automatic

transmission.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

OTQ067006 OTQ067007

WARNING

Ensure the spare tyre retainer is

properly aligned with the centre

of the spare tyre to prevent the

spare tyre “rattling”. Otherwise,

it may cause the spare tyre to

fall off the carrier and lead to an

accident.

OTQ047006K/H

What to do in an emergency

106

4. Remove the wheel brace, jack and

spare tyre from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the

wheel that is diagonally opposite

the jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel nuts counter-

clockwise one turn each, but do

not remove any nut until the tyre

has been raised off the ground.

OTQ067022 OTQ067008

WARNING -

Changing a tyre

• To prevent vehicle movement

whilst changing a tyre, always

set the parking brake fully,

and always block the wheel

diagonally opposite the wheel

being changed.

• We recommend that the

wheels of the vehicle be

blocked, and that no person

remain in a vehicle that is

being jacked.

611

What to do in an emergency

7. Place the jack at the front or rear

jacking position closest to the tyre

you are changing. Place the jack

at the designated locations under

the frame. The jacking positions

are plates welded to the frame

with two tabs and a raised dot to

index with the jack.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tyre just clears the

ground. This measurement is

approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).

Before removing the wheel nuts,

make sure the vehicle is stable

and that there is no chance for

movement or slippage.

9. Loosen the wheel nuts and

remove them with your fingers.

Slide the wheel off the studs and

lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To

put the wheel on the hub, pick up

the spare tyre, line up the holes

with the studs and slide the wheel

onto them. If this is difficult, tip the

wheel slightly and get the top hole

in the wheel lined up with the top

stud. Then jiggle the wheel back

and forth until the wheel can be

slid over the other studs.

WARNING - Jack location

To reduce the possibility of

injury, be sure to use only the

jack provided with the vehicle

and in the correct jack position;

never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

OTQ067018 OTQ067016

What to do in an emergency

126

10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on

the studs, put the wheel nuts on

the studs and tighten them finger

tight. The nuts should be installed

with their tapered small diameter

ends directed inward. Jiggle the

tyre to be sure it is completely

seated, then tighten the nuts as

much as possible with your fin-

gers again.

11. Lower the car to the ground by

turning the wheel brace counter-

clockwise.

Then position the wheel brace as

shown in the drawing and tighten the

wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is

seated completely over the nut. Do

not stand on the wheel brace handle

or use an extension pipe over the

wheel brace handle. Go around the

wheel tightening every other nut until

they are all tight. Then double-check

each nut for tightness. After changing

wheels, we recommend that the sys-

tem be checked by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)

WARNING

Wheels may have sharp edges.

Handle them carefully to avoid

possible severe injury. Before

putting the wheel into place, be

sure that there is nothing on the

hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,

gravel, etc.) that interferes with

the wheel from fitting solidly

against the hub.

If there is, remove it. If there is

not good contact on the mount-

ing surface between the wheel

and hub, the wheel nuts could

come loose and cause the loss

of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may

result in loss of control of the

vehicle. This may cause serious

injury or death.

OTQ067011

613

What to do in an emergency

If you have a tyre gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure.

If the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest

service station and inflate to the cor-

rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust

it until it is correct. Always reinstall

the valve cap after checking or

adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is

not replaced, air may leak from the

tyre. If you lose a valve cap, buy

another and install it as soon as pos-

sible.

After you have changed wheels,

always secure the flat tyre in its place

and return the jack and tools to their

proper storage locations.

To prevent the jack, wheel brace and

spare tyre from rattling whilst the

vehicle is in motion, store them prop-

erly.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the wheel studs and nuts.

Make certain during wheel

removal that the same nuts that

were removed are reinstalled -

or, if replaced, that nuts with

metric threads and the same

chamfer configuration are used.

Installation of a non-metric

thread nut on a metric stud or

vice-versa will not secure the

wheel to the hub properly and

will damage the stud so that it

must be replaced.

Note that most nuts do not have

metric threads. Be sure to use

extreme care in checking for

thread style before installing

aftermarket wheel nuts or

wheels. If in doubt, we recom-

mend that you consult an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they

may lose their ability to retain

the wheel. This could lead to the

loss of the wheel and a collision

resulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequate

spare tyre pressure

Check the inflation pressures as

soon as possible after installing

the spare tyre. Adjust it to the

specified pressure, if necessary.

Refer to “Tyres and wheels” sec-

tion 9.

What to do in an emergency

146

TOWING

F080100BTQ-EA

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we

recommend having it done by an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial

tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-

ing procedures are necessary to prevent

damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel

dollies or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the

front wheels on the ground (without dol-

lies) and the rear wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-

sion components are damaged or the

vehicle is being towed with the rear

wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly

under the rear wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow

truck and wheel dollies are not used, the

rear of the vehicle should always be lift-

ed, not the front.

OTQ067012

OTQ067010

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground as this

may cause damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-

ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed

equipment.

OTQ067009

dolly

615

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an emer-

gency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.

2. Place the transmission shift lever in N

(Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

F080200ATQ

Removable towing hook

(front, if equipped)

1. Remove the towing hook from the tool

case.

2. Remove the hole cover on the front

bumper by turning it.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is fully

secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install

the cover after use.

CAUTION

Failure to place the transmission

shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause

internal damage to the transmis-

sion.

OTQ067019 OTQ067020

What to do in an emergency

166

F080300AEN-EA

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow

truck service.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tem-

porarily towed using a cable or chain

secured to the emergency towing hook

under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the

vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to

steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, power train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi-

tions from which the vehicle cannot be

driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the

vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other frequent-

ly.

• Before emergency towing, check that

the hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and

even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical angle.

Always pull straight ahead.

OTQ067021

OTQ067013

Front (if equipped)

Rear

CAUTION

• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow-

ing may damage the body of your

vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi-

cally intended for use in towing

vehicles. Securely fasten the

cable or chain to the towing hook

provided.

617

What to do in an emergency

• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16

feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth

(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the

middle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strap

is not loosened during towing.

F080301BUN

Emergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isn’t locked.

• Place the transmission shift lever in N

(Neutral).

• Release the parking bake.

• Press the brake pedal with more force

than normal since you will have

reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be required

because the power steering system

will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, the

brakes may overheat and brake per-

formance will be reduced. Stop often

and let the brakes cool off.

WARNING

Use extreme caution when towing

the vehicle.

• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving manoeuvres which would

place excessive stress on the

emergency towing hook and tow-

ing cable or chain. The hook and

towing cable or chain may break

and cause serious injury or dam-

age.

• If the disabled vehicle is unable

to be moved, do not forcibly con-

tinue the towing. Contact an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer or a

commercial tow truck service for

assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-

ing towing.

OTQ067014

What to do in an emergency

186

F080400AUN

Tie-down hook

(for flatbed towing)

WARNING

Do not use the hooks under the

front (or rear) of the vehicle for tow-

ing purposes. These hooks are

designed ONLY for transport tie-

down. If the tie-down hooks are

used for towing, the tie-down hooks

or front bumper will be damaged

and this could lead to serious

injury.

CAUTION - Automatic

transmission

• If the car is being towed with all

four wheels on the ground, it can

be towed only from the front. Be

sure that the transmission is in

neutral. Be sure the steering is

unlocked by placing the ignition

switch in the ACC position. A

driver must be in the towed vehi-

cle to operate the steering and

brakes.

• To avoid serious damage to the

automatic transmission, limit the

vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)

and drive less than 1.5 km (1

mile) when towing.

• Before towing, check the auto-

matic transmission fluid leak

under your vehicle. If the auto-

matic transmission fluid is leak-

ing, a flatbed equipment or tow-

ing dolly must be used.

Engine compartment / 7-2

Maintenance services / 7-4

Owner maintenance / 7-6

Scheduled maintenance service / 7-8

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-14

Engine oil / 7-17

Engine coolant / 7-18

Brake and clutch fluid / 7-21

Power steering fluid / 7-22

Automatic transmission fluid / 7-23

Washer fluid / 7-25

Parking brake / 7-25

Fuel filter / 7-26

Air cleaner / 7-27

Climate control air filter / 7-28

Wiper blades / 7-30

Battery / 7-33

Tyres and wheels / 7-35

Fuses / 7-46

Light bulbs / 7-56

Appearance care / 7-63

Emission control system / 7-69

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OTQ027003R

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(if equipped)

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Fuel filter

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Fuse box

7. Negative battery terminal

8. Positive battery terminal

9. Engine coolant reservoir

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Radiator cap

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

13. Air cleaner

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■

Diesel Engine

Maintenance

OTQ077066R

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(if equipped)

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Engine coolant reservoir

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Radiator cap

11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

12. Air cleaner

■

Petrol Engine

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

G020000AEN-EA

You should exercise the utmost care to

prevent damage to your vehicle and

injury to yourself whenever performing

any maintenance or inspection proce-

dures.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient

servicing may result in operational prob-

lems with your vehicle that could lead to

vehicle damage, an accident, or person-

al injury.

G020100AEN-EA

Owner’s responsibility

✽

NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record

Retention are the owner's responsibility.

We recommend in general that you have

your vehicle serviced by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

You should retain documents that show

proper maintenance has been performed

on your vehicle in accordance with the

scheduled maintenance service charts

shown on the following pages. You need

this information to establish your compli-

ance with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Repairs and adjustments required as a

result of improper maintenance or a lack

of required maintenance are not covered

when your vehicle is covered by warran-

ty.

G020200BEN-EA

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may

result in problems. This section gives

instructions only for the maintenance

items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, sev-

eral procedures can be done only by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer with special

tools.

✽

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during

the warranty period may affect warran-

ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-

rate Service Passport provided with the

vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-

icing or maintenance procedure, we rec-

ommend that the system be seviced by

an authorised HYUNDAIdealer.

Maintenance

G020300ATQ

WARNING

- Maintenance

work

• Performing maintenance work on

a vehicle can be dangerous. You

can be seriously injured whilst

performing some maintenance

procedures. If you lack sufficient

knowledge and experience or the

proper tools and equipment to do

the work, we recommend that the

system be servied by an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

• Working under the bonnet with

the engine running is dangerous.

It becomes even more dangerous

when you wear jewelry or loose

clothing. These can become

entangled in moving parts and

result in injury. Therefore, if you

must run the engine whilst work-

ing under the bonnet, make cer-

tain that you remove all jewelry

(especially rings, bracelets,

watches, and necklaces) and all

neckties, scarves, and similar

loose clothing before getting

near the engine or cooling fans.

WARNING - Diesel Engine

Never work on injection system

with engine running or within 30

seconds after shutting off engine.

High-pressure pump, rail, injectors

and high-pressure pipes are sub-

ject to high pressure even after the

engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-

duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-

ous injury, if it touches the body.

People using pacemakers should

not move than 30cm closer to the

ECU or wiring harness within the

engine room whilst engine is run-

ning, since the high currents in the

electronic engine control system

produce considerable magnetic

fields.

CAUTION

• Do not put heavy objects or apply

excessive force on top of the

engine cover (if equipped) or fuel

related parts.

• When you inspect the fuel system

(fuel lines and fuel injection

devices), we recommend that you

contact an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

• Do not drive long time with the

engine cover(if equipped)

removed.

• When checking the engine room,

do not go near fire. Fuel, washer

fluid, etc. are flammable oils that

may cause fire.

• Before touching the battery, igni-

tion cables and electrical wiring,

you should disconnect the bat-

tery "-" terminal. You may get an

electric shock from the electric

current.

• When you remove the interior

trim cover with a flat head (-) driv-

er, be careful not to damage the

cover.

• Be careful when you replace and

clean bulbs to avoid burns or

electrical shock.

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE

G030000AEN-EA

The following lists are vehicle checks and

inspections that should be performed at

the frequencies indicated to help ensure

safe, dependable operation of your vehi-

cle.

If you have any question, we recommend

that you consult an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are

generally not covered by warranties and

you may be charged for labour, parts and

lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

G030101AUN-EA

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tyres.

G030102AUN-EA

Whilst operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes

in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice any increased steering

effort or looseness in the steering

wheel, or change in its straight-ahead

position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns

slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-

elling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for

unusual sounds, pulling to one side,

increased brake pedal travel or “hard-

to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-

ation of your transmission occurs,

check the transmission fluid level.

• Check automatic transmission P (Park)

function.

• Check parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-

ing system during or after use is nor-

mal).

WARNING

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant level when the

engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure. This could cause burns

or other serious injury.

Maintenance

G030103AUN-EA

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-

nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tyres including the spare.

G030104AUN-EA

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :

• Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check windshield washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper blades

with clean cloth dampened with wash-

er fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.

• Check for worn tyres and loose wheel

nuts.

G030105AUN-EA

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

bonnet hinges.

• Lubricate door and bonnet locks and

latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Check the power steering fluid level.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic trans-

mission linkage and controls.

• Clean battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

G040000ATQ-EA

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if

the vehicle is usually operated where

none of the following conditions apply. If

any of the following conditions apply, fol-

low Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy

areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in cold

temperatures and/or extremely humid

climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy city

traffic during hot weather above 32°C

(90°F).

If your vehicle is operated under the

above conditions, you should inspect,

replace or refill more frequently than the

following Normal Maintenance Schedule.

After the periods or distance shown in

the chart, continue to follow the pre-

scribed maintenance intervals.

Maintenance

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

R : Replace or change.

: Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped). Inspect and if nec-

essary correct or replace.

: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km or before starting a long trip.

: If good quality petrol meeting Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalent, including fuel additives is not available, one bot-

tle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorised HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how

to use them. Do not mix other additives.

G040300ETQ-EA

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

Drive belts *

Diesel

At first, inspect 80,000 km or 48 months

after that, inspect every 20,000 km or 12 months

Petrol I I I I

Engine oil and engine oil filter *

R R R R R R R R

Fuel additives *

Add every 15,000 km or 12 months

Air cleaner filter I I R I I R I I

Spark plug Petrol Replace every 100,000 km

Vapour hose and fuel filler cap I I

Vacuum and crankcase ventilation

hoses

Petrol I I I I

Vacuum hose (for EGR & throttle body)

(if equipped)

I I I I I I I I

Vacuum pump and vaccum hose Diesel I I I I I I I I

Vaccum pump oil hose Diesel I I I I I I I I

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Maintenance

107

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

R : Replace or change.

: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">.

If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. HYUNDAI recommends "every

7,500km inspection, every 15,000km replacement". If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging,

loss of power, hard starting problem etc., replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer for details.

: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule

depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard start-

ing problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer for details.

: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at

the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

Fuel filter cartridge *

Diesel I R I R

Fuel filter *

Petrol I R I R

Fuel lines, hoses and connections

Diesel I I I I

Petrol I I

Cooling system

Inspect “Coolant level and leak” every day

Inspect “Water pump” when replacing the drive belt or timing belt

Engine coolant *

At first, replace at 210,000 km or 10 years:

after that, replace every 30,000 km or 24 months *

Battery condition I I I I I I I I

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

711

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

R : Replace or change.

: Rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

All electrical systems

(including the light bulbs and switches)

I I I I I I I I

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I

Brake pedal I I I I

Parking brake I I I I I I I I

Brake fluid I I I I I I I I

Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I

Power steering fluid and hoses I I I I I I I I

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I

Propeller shaft I I I I

Tyre (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I

Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I

Bolt and nuts on chassis and body I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped) I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner compressor (if equipped) I I I I I I I I

Climate control air filter (if equipped) R R R R R R R R

Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) I I

Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped) I I

Rear axle oil *

I I I I

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Maintenance

127

G040200BTQ-EA

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace

Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 7,500 km or 6 months

Air cleaner filter R C, E

Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) R Every 120,000 km C, D, E, G, H, I, K

Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped) R Every 100,000 km

Rear axle oil R Every 90,000 km C, E, G, H, I, K

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Maintenance

operation

Maintenance intervals

Driving condition

Replace more frequently

depending on the condition

A, B, C, E, F, G, H,

I, J, L

A, C, D, E, F, G, H,

I, K

713

Maintenance

Severe driving conditions

A : Repeated short distance driving

B : Extensive idling

C : Driving in dusty, rough roads

D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive

materials or in very cold weather

E : Driving in sandy areas

F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot

weather above 32°C (90°F)

G : Driving in mountainous areas

H : Towing a trailer

I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle tow-

ing

J : Driving over 140 km/h

K : Driving over 170 km/h

L : Frequently driving in stop - and - go conditions

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I C, D, E, F, G

Propeller shaft I Every 15,000 km or 12 months C, E

Front suspension ball joints I C, D, E, F, G

Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I C, D, E, G, H

Parking brake I C, D, G, H

Climate control air filter (if equipped) R C, E

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Maintenance

operation

Maintenance intervals

Driving condition

Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition

Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition

Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition

Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition

Replace more frequently

depending on the condition

Maintenance

147

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

G050100AUN

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in the

maintenance schedule. If the car is being

driven in severe conditions, more fre-

quent oil and filter changes are required.

G050200BUN

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of

cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-

ration and replace if necessary. Drive

belts should be checked periodically for

proper tension and adjusted as neces-

sary.

G050300ATQ-EA

Fuel filter (cartridge)

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven, damage

the emission system and cause multiple

issues such as hard starting. If an exces-

sive amount of foreign matter accumu-

lates in the fuel tank, the filter may

require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine

for several minutes, and check for leaks

at the connections. We recommend that

the fuel filter be replaced by an authoized

HYUNDAI dealer.

G050400AEN-EA

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections for leakage and damage. We

recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses

and connectionsr be replaced by an

authoized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Diesel only

Never work on injection system

with engine running or within 30

seconds after shutting off engine.

High pressure pump, rail, injectors

and high pressure pipes are sub-

ject to high pressure even after the

engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-

duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-

ous injury, if it touch the body.

People using pacemakers should

not move than 30cm closer to the

ECU or wiring harness within the

engine room whilst engine is run-

ning, since the high currents in the

Common Rail system produce con-

siderable magnetic fields.

CAUTION

If the fuel filter becomes clogged as

a result of using dirty or contami-

nated fuel or failure to replace it at

the specified interval, fuel supply

may become restricted, which will

result in damage to the fuel injec-

tion system. These damages can

cause drivability problems and in

the worst case total fuel system fail-

ure.

CAUTION

When you are inspecting the belt,

place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF or ACC position.

715

Maintenance

G050600AUN-EA

Vapour hose and fuel filler cap

The vapour hose and fuel filler cap

should be inspected at those intervals

specified in the maintenance schedule.

Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel

filler cap is correctly replaced.

G050700AUN

Vacuum crankcase ventilation

hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence

of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard

and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,

abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-

cate deterioration. Particular attention

should be paid to examine those hose

surfaces nearest to high heat sources,

such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that

the hoses do not come in contact with

any heat source, sharp edges or moving

component which might cause heat dam-

age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose

connections, such as clamps and cou-

plings, to make sure they are secure, and

that no leaks are present. Hoses should

be replaced immediately if there is any

evidence of deterioration or damage.

G050800AEN

Air cleaner filter

We recommend that the air cleaner filter

be replaced by an authoized HYUNDAI

dealer.

G050900BUN-EA

Spark plugs (for petrol engine)

Make sure to install new spark plugs of

the correct heat range.

G051000AEN-EA

Valve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or

engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

We recommend that the system be serv-

iced by an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

G051100AUN

Cooling system

Check cooling system components, such

as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and

connections for leakage and damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

G051200AUN

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the

intervals specified in the maintenance

schedule.

G051300AUN

Manual transmission fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transmission fluid

according to the maintenance schedule.

WARNING

Do not disconnect and inspect

spark plugs when the engine is hot.

You may burn yourself.

Maintenance

167

G051400ATQ-EA

Automatic transmission fluid

(if equipped)

The fluid level should be in the "HOT"

range of the dipstick, after the engine

and transmission are at normal operating

temperature. Check the automatic trans-

mission fluid level with the engine run-

ning and the transmission in neutral, with

the parking brake properly applied.

✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is not equipped with the

automatic transmission level gauge,

have the automatic transmission fluid

inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer according to the maintenance

schedule.

G051500AUN

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and any

leakage. Replace any deteriorated or

damaged parts immediately.

G051600AUN

Brake fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid

reservoir. The level should be between

“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of

the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake

fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4

specification.

G051700AUN

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system includ-

ing the parking brake lever and cables.

G051900AGD

Brake discs, pads, calipers and

rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs

for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid

leakage.

For more information on checking the

pads or lining wear limit, refer to the

HYUNDAI web site.

(http://brakeman

ual.hmc.co.kr)

G052100AUN

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for

looseness or damage. Retighten to the

specified torque.

G052200AUN

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,

check for excessive free-play in the

steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage.

Check the dust boots and ball joints for

deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

G052300AEN

Power steering pump, belt and

hoses

Check the power steering pump and

hoses for leakage and damage. Replace

any damaged or leaking parts immedi-

ately. Inspect the power steering belt (or

drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,

excessive wear, oiliness and proper ten-

sion. Replace or adjust it if necessary.

G052500AUN

Air conditioning refrigerant

(if equipped)

Check the air conditioning lines and con-

nections for leakage and damage.

717

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

G060100CEN

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to

return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and

re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check

the level. The level should be between

F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring

the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from

being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants and capac-

ities” in section 9.)

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the

radiator hose when checking or

adding the engine oil as it may be

hot enough to burn you.

OTQ077002L OTQ077003L

CAUTION - Diesel engine

Overfilling the engine oil may cause

severe dieseling due to churning

effect. It may lead to engine damage

accompanied with abrupt engine

speed increment, combustion noise

and white smoke emission.

CAUTION

• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Engine damage may result.

• Do not spill engine oil, when

adding or changing engine oil. If

you drop the engine oil on the

engine room, wipe it off immedi-

ately.

• When you wipe the oil level

gauge, you should wipe it with a

clean cloth. When mixed with

debris, it can cause engine dam-

age.

Maintenance

187

G060200AEN-EA

Changing the engine oil and filter

We recommend that the engine oil and

filter be replaced by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

G070000BUN-EA

The high-pressure cooling system has a

reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze

coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-

tory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at the

beginning of the winter season, and

before travelling to a colder climate.

G070100AEN-EA

Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause irrita-

tion or cancer of the skin if left in

contact with the skin for prolonged

periods of time. Used engine oil

contains chemicals that have

caused cancer in laboratory ani-

mals. Always protect your skin by

washing your hands thoroughly

with soap and warm water as soon

as possible after handling used oil.

ENGINE COOLANT

WARNING

Removing radiator

cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-

ator cap whilst the engine is

operating or hot. Doing so might

lead to cooling system and

engine damage and could result

in serious personal injury from

escaping hot coolant or steam.

• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme care

when removing the radiator cap.

Wrap a thick towel around it, and

turn it counterclockwise slowly to

the first stop. Step back whilst

the pressure is released from the

cooling system. When you are

sure all the pressure has been

released, press down on the cap,

using a thick towel, and continue

turning counterclockwise to

remove it.

(Continued)

CAUTION

• Do not drive with no engine

coolant. It may cause water pump

failure and engine seizure, etc.

• When the engine overheats from

low engine coolant, suddenly

adding engine coolant may cause

cracks in the engine. To prevent

damage, add engine coolant

slowly in small quantities.

719

Maintenance

Check the condition and connections of

all cooling system hoses and heater

hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-

rated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between F and L marks on the side of the

coolant reservoir when the engine is

cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

specified coolant to provide protection

against freezing and corrosion. Bring the

level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent

additions are required, we recommend

that the system be inspected by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

G070101BUN-EA

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deion-

ized water or soft water for your vehicle

and never mix hard water in the

coolant filled at the factory. An improp-

er coolant mixture can result in serious

malfunction or engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minium engine parts and must be pro-

tected by an ethylene-glycol-based

coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-

ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the specified

coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less than

35% antifreeze, which would reduce

the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-

lowing table.

OTQ077004

(Continued)

• Even if the engine is not operat-

ing, do not remove the radiator

cap or the drain plug whilst the

engine and radiator are hot. Hot

coolant and steam may still blow

out under pressure, causing seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

The electric motor (cool-

ing fan) is controlled by

engine coolant tempera-

ture, refrigerant pres-

sure and vehicle speed.

It may sometimes operate even

when the engine is not running.

Use extreme caution when working

near the blades of the cooling fan

so that you are not injured by a

rotating fan blades. As the engine

coolant temperature decreases, the

electric motor will automatically

shut off. This is a normal condition.

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze Water

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

Maintenance

207

G070200AEN-EA

Changing the coolant

We recommend that the coolant be

replaced by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

OTQ072005

CAUTION

Put a thick cloth around the radiator

cap before refilling the coolant in

order to prevent the coolant from

overflowing into engine parts such

as the generator.

WARNING -

Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or damage

to paint and body trim.

WARNING

Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine and radiator are

hot. Scalding hot coolant and

steam may blow out under pres-

sure causing serious injury.

721

Maintenance

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID

G080100AEN-EA

Checking the brake/clutch fluid

level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-

odically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and

adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area

around the reservoir cap thoroughly to

prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level. The level will fall with accumulated

mileage. This is a normal condition asso-

ciated with the wear of the brake linings.

If the fluid level is excessively low, we

recommend that the system be checked

by an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants or

capacities” in section 9.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

✽

NOTICE

Before removing the brake/clutch filter

cap, read the warning on the cap.

WARNING -

Brake/clutch

fluid

When changing and adding brake/

clutch fluid, handle it carefully. Do

not let it come in contact with your

eyes. If brake/clutch fluid should

come in contact with your eyes,

immediately flush them with a large

quantity of fresh tap water. Have

your eyes examined by a doctor as

soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brake/

clutch fluid

In the event the brake/clutch sys-

tem requires frequent additions of

fluid, we recommend that the sys-

tem be inspected by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

OTQ077006R

CAUTION

Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to

contact the vehicle's body paint, as

paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch fluid, which has been

exposed to open air for an extended

time should never be used as its

quality cannot be guaranteed.

It should be disposed of properly.

Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid.

A few drops of mineral-based oil,

such as engine oil, in your brake/

clutch system can damage brake/

clutch system parts.

WARNING

Clean filler cap before removing.

Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake/

clutch fluid from a sealed container.

Maintenance

227

POWER STEERING FLUID

G090100AEN-EA

Checking the power steering fluid

level

With the vehicle on level ground, check

the fluid level in the power steering reser-

voir periodically. The fluid should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir at the normal tem-

perature.

Before adding power steering fluid, thor-

oughly clean the area around the reser-

voir cap to prevent power steering fluid

contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level.

✽

NOTICE

Check that the fluid level is in the

"HOT" range on the reservoir. If the

fluid is cold, check that it is in the

"COLD" range.

In the event the power steering system

requires frequent additions of fluid, we

recommend that the system be inspect-

ed by an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

Use only the specified power steering

fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants

or capacities" in section 9.)

G090200AEN

Checking the power steering

hose

Check the connections for oil leaks, dam-

age and twists in the power steering

hose before driving.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operate the

vehicle for prolonged periods

with a low power steering fluid

level.

• Never start the engine when the

reservoir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be careful that

dirt does not get into the reser-

voir.

• Too little fluid can result in

increased steering effort and/or

noise from the power steering

system.

• The use of the non-specified fluid

could reduce the effectiveness of

the power steering system and

cause damage to it.

OTQ077007

723

Maintenance

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

G100100ATQ-EA

Checking the automatic transmis-

sion fluid level

✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is not equipped with the

automatic transmission level gauge,

have the automatic transmission fluid

inspected by an authorised Hyundai

dealer according to the maintenance

schedule.

If your vehicle is equipped with the

automatic transmission level gauge,

inspect the fluid level as follows.

The automatic transmission fluid level

should be checked regularly.

Keep the vehicle on the level ground with

the parking brake applied and check the

fluid level according to the following pro-

cedure.

1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)

position and confirm the engine is run-

ning at normal idle speed.

2. After the transmission is warmed up

sufficiently (fluid temperature 70~80°C

(158~176°F), for example by 10 min-

utes usual driving, move the shift lever

through all positions then place the

selector lever in “N (Neutral) or P

(Park)” position.

3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”

range on the level gauge. If the fluid

level is lower, add the specified fluid

from the fill hole. If the fluid level is

higher, drain the fluid from the drain

hole.

4. If the fluid level is checked in cold con-

dition (fluid temperature 20~30°C

(68~86°F) add the fluid to “C” (COLD)

line and then recheck the fluid level

according to the above step 2.

OTQ077009

OTQ077008

OTQ073008

■ Type A

■ Type B

Maintenance

247

✽

NOTICE

“C” (COLD) range is for reference only

and should NOT be used to determine

transmission fluid level.

✽

NOTICE

New automatic transmission fluid

should be red. The red dye is added so

the assembly plant can identify it as

automatic transmission fluid and distin-

guish it from engine oil or antifreeze.

The red dye, which is not an indicator of

fluid quality, is not permanent. As the

vehicle is driven, the automatic trans-

mission fluid will begin to look darker.

The colour may eventually appear light

brown. Therefore, have an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer change the automatic

transmission fluid according to the

Scheduled Maintenance at the begin-

ning of this section.

Use only the specified automatic trans-

mission fluid. (Refer to “Recommended

lubricants and capacities” in section 9.)

G100200AFD-EA

Changing the automatic transmis-

sion fluid

Have automatic transmission fluid

changed by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer according to the Maintenance

Schedule at the beginning of this section.

WARNING -

Transmission

fluid

The transmission fluid level should

be checked when the engine is at

normal operating temperature. This

means that the engine, radiator,

radiator hose and exhaust system

etc., are very hot. Exercise great

care not to burn yourself during

this procedure.

WARNING - Parking brake

To avoid sudden movement of the

vehicle, apply parking brake and

depress the brake pedal before

moving the shift lever.

CAUTION

• Low fluid level causes transmis-

sion slippage. Overfilling can

cause foaming, loss of fluid and

transmission malfunction.

• The use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transmission mal-

function and failure.

725

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID

G120100AUN

Checking the washer fluid level

The reservoir is translucent so that you

can check the level with a quick visual

inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid

reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain

water may be used if washer fluid is not

available. However, use washer solvent

with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

G140100AFD-EA

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking brake by

counting the number of “clicks’’ heard

whilst fully applying it from the released

position. Also, the parking brake alone

should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-

ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or

less than specified, we recommend that

the system be serviced by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 7 “clicks’’ at a force of

20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or damage

to paint and body trim.

• Windshield Washer fluid agents

contain some amounts of alcohol

and can be flammable under cer-

tain circumstances. Do not allow

sparks or flame to contact the

washer fluid or the washer fluid

reservoir. Damage to the vehicle

or occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-

sonous to humans and animals.

Do not drink and avoid contacting

windshield washer fluid. Serious

injury or death could occur.

OTQ057008

PARKING BRAKE

OTQ077010

OTQ077011

Rear (if equipped)

Front

Maintenance

267

FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)

G150100AFD-EA

Draining water from fuel filter

The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an

important role of separating water from

fuel and accumulating the water in its

bottom.

If water accumulates in the

fuel filter, the warning light

comes on when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

If this warning light turned

on, we recommend that the

system be serviced by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

G150200AEN

Fuel filter cartridge replacement

✽

NOTICE

When replacing the fuel filter cartridge,

we recommend that you use parts for

replacement from an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

OTQ077012R

CAUTION

If the water accumulated in the fuel

filter is not drained at proper times,

damages to the major parts such as

the fuel system can be caused by

water permeation in the fuel filter.

727

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

G160100AEN

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary, and

should not be cleaned and reused.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching

clips and open the cover.

2. Replace the air cleaner filter.

3. Lock the cover with the cover attaching

clips.

OTQ077013 OTQ077014

OTQ077015

OTQ077016

Maintenance

287

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-

ment more often than the usual recom-

mended intervals. (Refer to

“Maintenance under severe usage condi-

tions” in this section.)

G170100BEN

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should be

replaced according to the maintenance

schedule. If the vehicle is operated in

severely air-polluted cities or on dusty

rough roads for a long period, it should

be inspected more frequently and

replaced earlier. When you replace the

climate control air filter, replace it per-

forming the following procedure, and be

careful to avoid damaging other compo-

nents.

G170200ATQ

Filter replacement

1. Open the glove box and remove the

support rod (1).

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in exces-

sive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner fil-

ter, be careful that dust or dirt

does not enter the air intake, or

damage may result.

• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use

of non-genuine parts could dam-

age the air flow sensor or tur-

bocharger.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ077018R

729

Maintenance

2. With the glove box open, remove the

stoppers on both sides to allow the

glove box to hang freely on the hinges.

3. Remove the climate control air filter

cover by turning the cover stopper (1)

and then remove the air filters.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order of

disassembly.

✽

NOTICE

Install a new climate control air filter in

the correct direction with the arrow

symbol (

↓

) facing downwards.

Otherwise, the climate control effects

may decrease, possibly with a noise.

OTQ077019R OTQ077020R OTQ077021

Maintenance

307

WIPER BLADES

G180100AUN-EA

Blade inspection

✽

NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-

matic car washes have been known to

make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or

the wiper blades with foreign matter can

reduce the effectiveness of the wind-

shield wipers. Common sources of con-

tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot

wax treatments used by some commer-

cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-

ing properly, clean both the window and

the blades with a good cleaner or mild

detergent, and rinse thoroughly with

clean water.

G180200AUN

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean ade-

quately, the blades may be worn or

cracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122/H

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use petrol, kerosene,

paint thinner, or other solvents on

or near them.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manual-

ly.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper malfunc-

tion and failure.

731

Maintenance

G180201ATQ

Front windshield wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Compress the clip and slide the blade

assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

1LDA5023

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windshield, since it may

chip or crack the windshield.

1JBA70381JBA7037

Maintenance

327

G180202AFD-EA

Rear window wiper blade

(if equipped)

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the

wiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly by

inserting the centre part into the slot in

the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly is

installed firmly by trying to pull it slight-

ly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or

other components, we recommend that

the wiper blades be replaced by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

OEN076018

OEN076019

733

Maintenance

BATTERY

G190100DUN

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleum

jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the

battery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for

an extended time, disconnect the bat-

tery cables.

✽

NOTICE

Basically equipped battery is mainte-

nance free type. If your vehicle is

equipped with the battery marked with

LOWER and UPPER on the side, you

can check the electrolyte level. The elec-

trolyte level should be between LOWER

and UPPER. If the electrolyte level is

low, it needs to add distilled (demineral-

ized) water (Never add sulfuric acid or

other electrolyte). When refill, be care-

ful not to splash the battery and adja-

cent components. And do not overfill the

battery cells. It can cause corrosion on

other parts. After then ensure that tight-

en the cell caps. We recommend that you

contact an authorised HYUNDAI deal-

er.

OTQ077022

WARNING

- Battery

dangers

Always read the following

instructions carefully when

handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and

all other flames or sparks

away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-

bustible gas, is always

present in battery cells and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the

reach of children because

batteries contain highly

corrosive SULFURIC ACID.

Do not allow battery acid to

contact your skin, eyes,

clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

Maintenance

347

❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle

may differ from the illustration.

Battery capacity label

1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model

name of battery

2. 12V : The nominal voltage

3. 60Ah (20HR) : The nominal capacity

(in Ampere hours)

4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity

(in min.)

5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in

amperes by SAE

6. 440A : The cold-test current in

amperes by EN

(Continued)

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on the

case may cause battery acid to

leak, resulting in personal injury.

Lift with a battery carrier or with

your hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge the

battery when the battery cables

are connected.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage. Never

touch these components with the

engine running or the ignition

switched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-

ings can result in serious bodily

injury or death.

CAUTION

If you connect unauthorised elec-

tronic devices to the battery, the

battery may be discharged. Never

use unauthorised devices.

OJD072039

■ Example

(Continued)

If any electrolyte gets into

your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least

15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention. If

electrolyte gets on your

skin, thoroughly wash the

contacted area. If you feel a

pain or a burning sensa-

tion, get medical attention

immediately.

Wear eye protection when

charging or working near a

battery. Always provide

ventilation when working in

an enclosed space.

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local

law(s) or regulation.

(Continued)

735

Maintenance

G190200AUN

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example, the

headlights or interior lights were left on

whilst the vehicle was not in use),

recharge it by slow charging (trickle)

for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges

because of high electric load whilst the

vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-

30A for two hours.

G190300BTQ

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery

has been discharged or the battery has

been disconnected.

• Climate control system

(See section 4)

• Clock (See section 4)

• Audio (See section 4)

• Auto up/down window (See section 4)

• Trip computer (See section 4)

WARNING

- Recharging

battery

When recharging the battery,

observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in an

area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,

or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-

ing, and stop or reduce the charg-

ing rate if the battery cells begin

gassing (boiling) violently or if

the temperature of the electrolyte

of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when check-

ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in

the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main

switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from

the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from

the positive battery terminal.

WARNING

• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn off

all accessories and stop the

engine.

• The negative battery cable must

be removed first and installed

last when the battery is discon-

nected.

Maintenance

367

TYRES AND WHEELS

G200100AUN-EA

Tyre care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tyre

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

G200200AEN-EA

Recommended cold tyre inflation

pressures

All tyre pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tyres are cold. “Cold Tyres” means

the vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven less than

1.6 km (one mile).

Recommended pressures must be

maintained for the best ride, top vehi-

cle handling, and minimum tyre

wear.

For recommended inflation pressure,

refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the vehicle.

WARNING - Tyre underin-

flation

Severe underinflation can lead

to severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tyre failures that can

result in the loss of vehicle con-

trol leading to severe injury or

death. This risk is much higher

on hot days and when driving

for long periods at high speeds.

OTQ087003/H

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling

and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation also is

possible. Keep your tyre pres-

sures at the proper levels. If a

tyre frequently needs refilling,

we recommend that the sys-

tem be checked by an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer.

• Overinflation produces a

harsh ride, excessive wear at

the centre of the tyre tread,

and a greater possibility of

damage from road hazards.

737

Maintenance

G200300AUN-EA

Checking tyre inflation pressure

Check your tyres once a month or

more.

Also, check the tyre pressure of the

spare tyre.

G200301AEN-EA

How to check

Use a good quality gauge to check

tyre pressure. You can not tell if your

tyres are properly inflated simply by

looking at them. Radial tyres may

look properly inflated even when

they're underinflated.

Check the tyre's inflation pressure

when the tyres are cold. - "Cold"

means your vehicle has been sitting

for at least three hours or driven no

more than 1.6 km (1 mile).

WARNING - Tyre Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation

can reduce tyre life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tyre failure. This

could result in loss of vehicle

control and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tyre pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tyre pressure when the

tyres are cold. (After vehicle

has been parked for at least

three hours or hasn't been

driven more than 1.6 km (one

mile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your

spare tyre each time you

check the pressure of other

tyres.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a

vehicle luggage rack if your

vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tyres can cause

accidents. If your tread is

badly worn, or if your tyres

have been damaged, replace

them.

CAUTION

• Warm tyres normally exceed

recommended cold tyre pres-

sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6

psi). Do not release air from

warm tyres to adjust the pres-

sure or the tyres will be under-

inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tyre

inflation valve caps. Without

the valve cap, dirt or moisture

could get into the valve core

and cause air leakage. If a

valve cap is missing, install a

new one as soon as possible.

Maintenance

387

Remove the valve cap from the tyre

valve stem. Press the tyre gauge

firmly onto the valve to get a pres-

sure measurement. If the cold tyre

inflation pressure matches the rec-

ommended pressure on the tyre and

loading information label, no further

adjustment is necessary. If the pres-

sure is low, add air until you reach

the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tyre, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

centre of the tyre valve. Recheck the

tyre pressure with the tyre gauge. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. They help prevent

leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-

ture.

G200400AUN-EA

Tyre rotation

To equalise tread wear, it is recom-

mended that the tyres be rotated

every 15,000 km or sooner if irregu-

lar wear develops.

During rotation, check the tyres for

correct balance.

When rotating tyres, check for

uneven wear and damage. Abnormal

wear is usually caused by incorrect

tyre pressure, improper wheel align-

ment, out-of-balance wheels, severe

braking or severe cornering. Look for

bumps or bulges in the tread or side

of tyre. Replace the tyre if you find

either of these conditions. Replace

the tyre if fabric or cord is visible.

After rotation, be sure to bring the

front and rear tyre pressures to spec-

ification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section

WARNING

• Inspect your tyres frequently

for proper inflation as well as

wear and damage. Always use

a tyre pressure gauge.

• Tyres with too much or too lit-

tle pressure wear unevenly

causing poor handling, loss of

vehicle control, and sudden

tyre failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and even death.

The recommended cold tyre

pressure for your vehicle can

be found in this manual and on

the tyre label located on the

driver's side centre pillar.

• Worn tyres can cause acci-

dents. Replace tyres that are

worn, show uneven wear, or

are damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-

sure of your spare tyre.

HYUNDAI recommends that

you check the spare every

time you check the pressure

of the other tyres on your

vehicle.

739

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tyres are rotated.

✽

NOTICE

Rotate radial tyres that have an

asymmetric tread pattern only from

front to rear and not from right to

left.

G200500AUN-EA

Wheel alignment and tyre balance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tyre

life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tyre

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare

tyre for tyre rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tyres under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that could result in death,

severe injury, or property

damage.

CAUTION

Improper wheel weights can

damage your vehicle's alumini-

um wheels. Use only approved

wheel weights.

S2BLA790

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tyre

With a full-size spare tyre

Directional tyres (if equipped)

Maintenance

407

G200600CEN-EA

Tyre replacement

If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread

wear indicator will appear as a solid

band across the tread. This shows

there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch)

of tread left on the tyre. Replace the

tyre when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tyre.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

WARNING

- Replacing

tyres

To reduce the chance or serious

or fatal injuries from an acci-

dent caused by tyre failure or

loss of vehicle control:

• Replace tyres that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tyres can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, and

traction.

• Do not drive your vehicle with

too little or too much pressure

in your tyres. This can lead to

uneven wear and tyre failure.

• When replacing tyres, never

mix radial and bias-ply tyres

on the same car. You must

replace all tyres (including the

spare) if moving from radial to

bias-ply tyres.

(Continued)

CAUTION

When replacing the tyres,

recheck and tighten the wheel

nuts after driving about 1,000

km (620 miles). If the steering

wheel shakes or the vehicle

vibrates whilst driving, the tyre

is out of balance. Align the tyre

balance. If the problem is not

solved, we recommend that you

contact an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

741

Maintenance

G200700BUN-EA

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

G200800AUN-EA

Tyre traction

Tyre traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tyres, tyres that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tyres should be

replaced when tread wear indicators

appear. To reduce the possibility of

losing control, slow down whenever

there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

G200900AUN-EA

Tyre maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tyre wear. If you find a tyre is worn

unevenly, have your dealer check the

wheel alignment.

When you have new tyres installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tyre life. Additionally, a tyre should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct

size may adversely affect wheel

and bearing life, braking and

stopping abilities, handling

characteristics, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tyre clearance,

snow chain clearance,

speedometer and odometer cal-

ibration, headlight aim and

bumper height.

(Continued)

• Using tyres and wheel other

than the recommended sizes

could cause unusual handling

characteristics and poor vehi-

cle control, resulting in a seri-

ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meet

HYUNDAI’s specifications

may fit poorly and result in

damage to the vehicle or

unusual handling and poor

vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparing

the speed of the wheels. Tyre

size can affect wheel speed.

When replacing tyres, all 4

tyres must use the same size

originally supplied with the

vehicle. Using tyres of a dif-

ferent size can cause the ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System) and

ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) (if equipped) to work

irregularly.

Maintenance

427

G201000AUN-EA

Tyre sidewall labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tyre and also provides

the tyre identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tyre in

case of a recall.

G201001AUN

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.

G201002AEN-EA

2. Tyre size designation

A tyre’s sidewall is marked with a tyre

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tyres for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tyre size designation

mean.

Example tyre size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tyre size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

P245/65R17 105T

P - Applicable vehicle type (tyres

marked with the prefix “P’’ are

intended for use on passenger

cars or light trucks; however, not

all tyres have this marking).

245 - Tyre width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tyre’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tyre construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

105 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tyre can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one. The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

5,6

743

Maintenance

Tyre speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger car tyres. The

speed rating is part of the tyre size

designation on the sidewall of the

tyre. This symbol corresponds to that

tyre's designed maximum safe oper-

ating speed.

G201003AEN-EA

3. Checking tyre life (TIN : Tyre

Identification Number)

Any tyres that are over 6 years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tyre) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tyre

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tyre consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tyre size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents

that the tyre was produced in the

16th week of 2014.

G201004AEN-EA

4. Tyre ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tyre. Tyre

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tyre, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D" means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

WARNING - Tyre age

Tyres degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, it is recommended that

tyres generally be replaced

after six (6) years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot cli-

mates or frequent high loading

conditions can accelerate the

aging process. Failure to follow

this warning can result in sud-

den tyre failure, which could

lead to a loss of control and an

accident involving serious

injury or death.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

Maximum Speed

Speed

Rating

Symbol

Maintenance

447

G201005AUN-EA

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tyre. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tyre and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

G201006AUN-EA

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tyre. When

replacing the tyres on the vehicle,

always use a tyre that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tyre.

G2010007BEN-EA

7. Uniform tyre quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tyre sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example:

TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATUE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tyre when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tyre

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tyre graded

100.

The relative performance of tyres

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are moulded on the

side-walls of passenger vehicle

tyres.The tyres available as standard

or optional equipment on your vehi-

cle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tyre’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tyre is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

745

Maintenance

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tyre’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high tempera-

ture can cause the material of the

tyre to degenerate and reduce tyre

life, and excessive temperature can

lead to sudden tyre failure. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of per-

formance on the laboratory test

wheel than the minimum required by

law.

Low aspect ratio tyre

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tyre s, whose

aspect ratio is lower than 50, are pro-

vided for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tyre s

are optimized for handling and brak-

ing, it may be more uncomfortable to

ride in and there is more noise com-

pare with normal tyres.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low

aspect ratio tyre is shorter than

the normal, the wheel and tyre of

the low aspect ratio tyre is easier

to be damaged. So, follow the

instructions below.

- When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously

because tyre s and wheels may

be damaged. And after driving,

inspect tyre s and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole,

speed bump, manhole, or curb

stone, drive slowly so that the

tyre s and wheels are not dam-

aged.

(Continued)

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize the

tyre damage with your own

eyes. But if there is the slight-

est hint of tyre damage, even

though you cannot see the

tyre damage with your own

eyes, have the tyre checked or

replaced because the tyre

damage may cause air leak-

age from the tyre .

• If the tyre is damaged by driv-

ing on a rough road, off road,

pothole, manhole, or curb

stone, it will not be covered by

the warranty.

• You can find out the tyre infor-

mation on the tyre sidewall.

(Continued)

- If the tyre is impacted, we rec-

ommend that you inspect the

tyre condition or contact an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tyre ,

inspect the tyre condition and

pressure every 3,000km.

WARNING - Tyre

temperature

The temperature grade for this

tyre is established for a tyre that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat

build-up and possible sudden

tyre failure. This can cause loss

of vehicle control and serious

injury or death.

Maintenance

467

FUSES

G210000CEN-EA

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected

from electrical overload damage by

fuses.

This vehicle has 3 fuse panels, one locat-

ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, the

other in the engine compartment.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check the

appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has

blown, the element inside the fuse will be

melted.

If the electrical system does not work,

first check the driver’s side fuse panel.

Before replacing a blown fuse, turn off

the ignition. and then disconnect the neg-

ative battery cable. replace it in a safe

place.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of

the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-

cates an electrical problem. Avoid using

the system involved and immediately

consult an authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type

for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,

and fusible link for higher amperage rat-

ings.

✽

NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may

differ from equipped items.

1VQA4037

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING

- Fuse replace-

ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly a

fire.

• Never install a wire or aluminum

foil instead of the proper fuse -

even as a temporary repair. It may

cause extensive wiring damage

and a possible fire.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove fuses

because it may cause a short circuit

and damage the system.

747

Maintenance

G210100AFD-EA

Instrument panel fuse replace-

ment

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.

Use the removal tool provided in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown.

Spare fuses are provided in the inner

fuse panel (or in the engine compart-

ment fuse panel).

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of

the same rating from a circuit you may

not need for operating the vehicle, such

as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-

ponents do not work and the fuses are

OK, check the fuse panel in the engine

compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must

be replaced.

OTQ077041ROTQ077040R

Maintenance

487

G210101AUN

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a memory

fuse to prevent battery discharge if your

vehicle is parked without being operated

for prolonged periods. Use the following

procedures before parking the vehicle for

prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.

3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the memory fuse.

✽

NOTICE

• If the memory fuse is pulled up from

the fuse panel, the warning chime,

audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,

will not operate. Some items must be

reset after replacement. Refer to

“Battery” in this section.

• Even though the memory fuse is

pulled up, the battery can still be dis-

charged by operation of the head-

lights or other electrical devices.

G210200AEN-EA

Engine compartment fuse

replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling up.

OTQ077042

OTQ077043R

OTQ077044R

Diesel only

749

Maintenance

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,

use the fuse puller in the engine com-

partment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

G210201AEN-EA

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽

NOTICE

If the main fuse is blown, consult an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

After checking the fuse panel in the

engine compartment, securely

install the fuse panel cover. If not,

electrical failures may occur from

water contact.

OTQ077045

Maintenance

507

✽

NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your vehi-

cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.

When you inspect the fuse panel in your

vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

Instrument panel fuse panel

Engine compartment fuse panel

OTQ077046R/OTQ077047R/OTQ077048R

G210300ATQ-EA

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Diesel only

751

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

AUDIO-2 10A Audio, Digital clock, BCM, Power outside mirror switch

C/LIGHTER 20A Cigarette lighter, Front power outlet

S/HTD DRI 10A Driver seat warmer switch (if equipped)

DRL 10A BCM (if equipped)

RR FOG LP 15A Rear fog lamp relay

H/LP 10A Head lamp High/Low relay

FRT WIPER 25A Front wiper relay, Front wiper motor

BCM 10A BCM

HTR 10A Front/Rear blower relay, Front/Rear A/C control module, Condenser fan relay, Electro chromic mirror, Thermo

switch, PTC heater relay (D4CB), EGR solenoid valve (D4BH)

B/UP LP 10A Back-up lamp relay, Back-up lamp switch, Transmission range switch

ABS 10A ABS/ESP(or ESC) control module, ESP(or ESC) switch (D4CB)

T/SIG LP 10A Hazard switch

A/BAG 10A SRS control module

A/BAG IND 10A Instrument cluster

MODULE 10A Instrument cluster, BCM, Immobiliser control module (D4BH), A/C relay (D4BH), Generator resister

ECU 10A Vehicle speed sensor, ECM, Air flow sensor (D4CB), Injection pump (D4BH), TCM, Fuel filter warning sensor

START 10A Start relay, Burglar alarm relay

MIRR HTD 10A Front A/C control module, Power outside mirror & defogger LH/RH

STOP LP 15A Stop lamp switch

BWS 10A Buzzer

Maintenance

527

Description Fuse rating Protected component

DR LOCK 20A Door lock/unlock relay

FRT FOG LP 10A Front fog lamp relay

B/ALARM 10A Burglar alarm horn relay

AUDIO-1 15A Audio

(POWER

CONNECTOR)

ROOM LP 10A Digital clock, Instrument cluster, Courtesy lamp LH/RH,

(POWER Step lamp LH/RH, Cargo lamp, Room lamp switch,

CONNECTOR) Door warning switch, Data link connector, BCM, Vanity lamp switch LH/RH, Overhead console lamp

HAZARD 15A Hazard relay, Hazard switch

FUEL LID 15A Fuel filler door relay

P/WDW LH 25A Power window main switch, Power window switch LH

P/WDW RH 25A Power window main switch, Power window switch RH

753

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

ALT 150A Fuse(A/CON, FRT DEICER), Fusible link(FRT HTR, RR HTR, RR HTD, C/FAN, F/FILTER, ABS 1/2),

Generator, E/R fuse & relay box RH

BATT 1 50A Fuse(DR LOCK, FRT FOG LP, B/ALARM, Power connector(AUDIO-1, ROOM LP))

BATT 2 30A Fuse(FUEL LID, P/WDW LH/RH, HAZARD), Multipurpose check connector

BATT 3/RAD FAN 40A Fuse(STOP LP, BWS), Radiator fan relay(G4KC)

IGN 1 40A Ignition switch(ACC, IG1)

IGN 2 40A Ignition switch(IG2, START), Start relay

ECU MAIN 30A/20A Engine control relay

FRT HTR 40A Front blower relay

RR HTD 40A Rear defogger relay

RR HTR 40A Rear blower relay

ABS 1 40A ABS control module(G4KC)

ABS 2 40A ABS control module(G4KC)

C/FAN 30A Condenser fan relay 1

F/FILTER 30A Fuel filter heater relay(DIESEL)

ECU/TCU 10A TCM, ECM (Petrol)

HORN 10A Horn relay

BURNER 20A Fuel fired heater control module(D4CB)

F/PUMP 15A Fuel pump relay(G4KC)

ALT 10A Generator(D4BH)

H/LP HI 15A Head lamp(HIGH) relay, Head lamp(LOW) relay

A/CON 10A A/C relay

FRT DEICER 15A Windshield defogger relay (if equipped)

TAIL LH 10A Head lamp LH(Position lamp), Rear combi lamp LH, License lamp LH

Maintenance

547

Description Fuse rating Protected component

TAIL RH 10A Head lamp RH(Position lamp), Rear combi lamp RH, License lamp RH

H/LP LO LH 10A Head lamp LH

H/LP LO RH 10A Head lamp RH

SNSR 1 10A A/C relay, Condenser fan relay(D4CB), Lambda sensor(D4CB), PTC heater relay #1(D4CB), Stop lamp

switch(D4CB)

SNSR 2 15A D4CB:Camshaft position sensor, Glow plug relay, EGR actuator, VGT control valve, Immobiliser control module

G4KC:Fuel pump relay, Canister purge solenoid valve, Oil control valve, Crankshaft position sensor, Oxygen

sensor, Immobiliser control module, Idle speed control actuator

IGN COIL 15A Ignition coil #1~#4(G4KC), Condenser(G4KC)

ECU 1 10A ECM(D4CB)

ECU 2 20A ECM(D4CB, G4KC), Injector #1~#4(G4KC)

SAFETY P/WDW 20A Safety power window

755

Maintenance

Engine compartment sub fuse panel (Diesel engine)

Description Fuse rating Protected component

GLOW 80A Glow plug relay

PTC 1 40A PTC heater relay #1

PTC 2 40A PTC heater relay #2

PTC 3 40A PTC heater relay #3

ABS 1 40A ABS/ESP control module

ABS 2 40A ABS/ESP control module

GLOW 10A ECM (D4BH)

Maintenance

567

LIGHT BULBS

G220000AEN-EA

Use only the bulbs of the specified

wattage.

All bulbs are available from your

HYUNDAI dealers Parts Department.

✽

NOTICE

After washing or driving through heavy

rain, condensation may form in the head

and tail lamp lenses. This condition is

caused by the temperature difference

between the lamp inside and outside.

This is similar to the condensation on

your windows inside your vehicle during

the rain and doesn’t indicate a problem

with your vehicle. If the water leaks into

the lamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle

checked by an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer.

G220100AUN

Headlight, position light, turn sig-

nal light, front fog light bulb

replacement

(1) Headlight (High)

(2) Headlight (Low)

(3) Position light

(4) Front turn signal light

(5) Front fog light (if equipped)

WARNING - Working on

the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly

apply the parking brake, ensure

that the ignition switch is turned to

the LOCK position and turn off the

lights to avoid sudden movement

of the vehicle and burning your fin-

gers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION

Be sure to replace the burned-out

bulb with one of the same wattage

rating. Otherwise, it may cause

damage to the fuse or electric

wiring system.

CAUTION

If you don’t have necessary tools,

the correct bulbs and the expertise,

consult an authorised HYUNDAI

dealer. In many cases, it is difficult

to replace vehicle light bulbs

because other parts of the vehicle

must be removed before you can

get to the bulb. This is especially

true if you have to remove the head-

light assembly to

get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing

the headlight

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

OTQ077049

757

Maintenance

G220101CTQ-EA

Headlight bulb

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by

turning it counterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly.

4. Install a new headlight bulb assembly.

5. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-

ing it clockwise.

✽

NOTICE

We recommend that the headlight aim-

ing be adjusted after an accident or

after the headlight assembly is rein-

stalled at a authorised HYUNDAI deal-

er.

(Continued)

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-

ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool

down before handling it.

OTQ077063 OTQ077062

WARNING -

Halogen bulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-

ized gas that will produce flying

pieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully,

and avoid scratches and abra-

sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid

contact with liquids. Never touch

the glass with bare hands.

Residual oil may cause the bulb

to overheat and burst when lit. A

bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlight.

(Continued)

Maintenance

587

G220102ATQ-EA

Turn signal light/position light, fog

light bulb (if equipped)

Turn signal light

1. If necessary, remove the headlight

assembly by loosening the headlight

installation bolts. When you remove

the headlight assembly, you may need

to remove the bumper according to the

vehicle.

2. Replace the malfunctioned light bulb.

3. Install the headlight assembly.

Fog light bulb (if equipped)

1. Remove the fog light under cover by

loosening the screw.

2. Replace the malfunctioned light bulb.

3. Install the fog light under cover.

Position light

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Remove the socket by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

4. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

5. Install the position light socket.

G220200AUN

Side repeater light bulb replace-

ment (if equipped)

1. Remove the light assembly from the

vehicle by prying the lens and pulling

the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connec-

tor.

3. Separate the socket and the lens parts

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the lens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

6. Reassemble the socket and the lens

part.

7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

OTQ077056OTQ077050

759

Maintenance

G220300ATQ

Rear combination light bulb

replacement

- Without rear fog light

(1) Tail light

(2) Back-up light

(3) Rear turn signal light

(4) Stop light

- With rear fog light

(1) Tail and stop light

(2) Back-up light

(3) Rear turn signal light

(4) Rear fog light

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Loosen the light assembly retaining

screws with a philips head screwdriver.

3. Remove the rear combination light

assembly from the body of the vehicle.

OTQ077052

OTQ077053

OTQ077051

OTQ077051G

Type B

Type A

Maintenance

607

4. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket. Pull

the bulb out of the socket.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it locks

into place.

7. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with the

slots in the assembly. Push the socket

into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

G220400ATQ

High mounted stop light replace-

ment (if equipped)

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Loosen the light assembly retaining

bolts with a proper tool.

OTQ077054

OTQ077055

OTQ077060G

OTQ077091

761

Maintenance

3. Remove the light assembly from the

body of the vehicle.

4. Separate the socket and the lens parts

by removing the screws with a philips

head screwdriver.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

6. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

7. Reassemble the socket and the lens

part.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

G220500AUN

License plate light bulb replace-

ment

1. Loosen the lens retaining screws with

a philips head screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the lens securely with the

lens retaining screws.

OTQ077092

OEN076039

OTQ077081

Type B

Type A

Maintenance

627

G220600AUN

Interior light bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently

pry the lens from the interior light

housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap the

lens into place.

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-

ton is depressed to avoid burning

your fingers or receiving an electric

shock.

CAUTION

Use care not to dirty or damage

lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

OTQ077065

OTQ077065G

OTQ077065L

Type A

Type B

Type C

763

Maintenance

Exterior care

G230101AUN

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning and

caution statements that appear on the

label.

G230102CEN-EA

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from

rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly

and frequently at least once a month with

lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-

ing, you should wash it after each off-

road trip. Pay special attention to the

removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,

mud, and other foreign materials. Make

sure the drain holes in the lower edges of

the doors and rocker panels are kept

clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar deposits

can damage your vehicle’s finish if not

removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water

may not completely remove all these

deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on

painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do

not allow soap to dry on the finish.

APPEARANCE CARE

CAUTION

• Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do

not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the

vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side

windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water. Water may leak through the

windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic

parts and lamps, do not clean

with chemical solvents or strong

detergents.

WARNING -

Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes whilst driving slowly to see

if they have been affected by water.

If braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly whilst maintaining a slow

forward speed.

Maintenance

647

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing. Use a good quality liquid or

paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect

it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials

with a spot remover will usually strip the

wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax

these areas even if the rest of the vehicle

does not yet need waxing.

G230103AUN

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust

and may develop into a major repair

expense.

✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires

any metal repair or replacement, be sure

the body shop applies anti-corrosion

materials to the parts repaired or

replaced.

G230104AUN

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or other

sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal

parts from corrosion, apply a coating of

wax or chrome preservative and rub to

a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts with

a heavier coating of wax or preserva-

tive. If necessary, coat the parts with

non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other

protective compound.

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plated

or anodized aluminium parts.This

may result in damage to the pro-

tective coating and cause discol-

oration or paint deterioration.

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressure

water washing may cause the fail-

ure of electrical circuits located in

the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electri-

cal/electronic components inside

the vehicle as this may damage

them.

OJB037800

765

Maintenance

G230105AUN

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may col-

lect on the underbody. If these materials

are not removed, accelerated rusting can

occur on underbody parts such as the

fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust

system, even though they have been

treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody

and wheel openings with lukewarm or

cold water once a month, after off-road

driving and at the end of each winter. Pay

special attention to these areas because

it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It

will do more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it. The

lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and

frame members have drain holes that

should not be allowed to clog with dirt;

trapped water in these areas can cause

rusting.

G230106BUN-EA

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a

clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wire

brushes on aluminum wheels. They

may scratch or damage the finish.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-

gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.

Also, be sure to clean the wheels after

driving on salted roads. This helps pre-

vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-

speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-

gent. It may damage and corrode the

aluminum wheels coated with a clear

protective finish.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes whilst driving slowly to see

if they have been affected by water.

If braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly whilst maintaining a slow

forward speed.

Maintenance

667

G230107AUN-EA

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and

construction practices to combat corro-

sion, HYUNDAI produces cars of the

highest quality. However, this is only part

of the job. To achieve the long-term cor-

rosion resistance your vehicle can deliv-

er, the owner's cooperation and assis-

tance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

on your car are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath the

car.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings

by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor

scrapes and dents which leave unpro-

tected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your car is

regularly exposed to corrosive materials,

corrosion protection is particularly impor-

tant. Some of the common causes of

accelerated corrosion are road salts,

dust control chemicals, ocean air and

industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which

corrosion is most likely to occur. For

example, corrosion is accelerated by

high humidity, particularly when tempera-

tures are just above freezing. In such

conditions, the corrosive material is kept

in contact with the car surfaces by mois-

ture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is

slow to dry and holds moisture in contact

with the vehicle. Although the mud

appears to be dry, it can still retain the

moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate

corrosion of parts that are not properly

ventilated so the moisture can be dis-

persed. For all these reasons, it is partic-

ularly important to keep your car clean

and free of mud or accumulations of

other materials. This applies not only to

the visible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the car.

767

Maintenance

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from get-

ting started by observing the following:

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to

keep your car clean and free of corrosive

materials. Attention to the underside of

the car is particularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —

where road salts are used, near the

ocean, areas with industrial pollution,

acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra

care to prevent corrosion. In winter,

hose off the underside of your car at

least once a month and be sure to

clean the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the car,

give particular attention to the compo-

nents under the fenders and other

areas that are hidden from view. Do a

thorough job; just dampening the accu-

mulated mud rather than washing it

away will accelerate corrosion rather

than prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly effec-

tive in removing accumulated mud and

corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members, be

sure that drain holes are kept open so

that moisture can escape and not be

trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly

ventilated garage. This creates a favor-

able environment for corrosion. This is

particularly true if you wash your car in

the garage or drive it into the garage

when it is still wet or covered with snow,

ice or mud. Even a heated garage can

contribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be

covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as

possible to reduce the possibility of cor-

rosion. If bare metal is showing through,

the attention of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-

ly corrosive and may damage painted

surfaces in just a few hours. Always

remove bird droppings as soon as possi-

ble.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats

and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check

under the mats periodically to be sure

the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if

you carry fertilisers, cleaning materials or

chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in proper

containers and any spills or leaks should

be cleaned up, flushed with clean water

and thoroughly dried.

Maintenance

687

Interior care

G230201CUN

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-

metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner and

air freshener from contacting the interior

parts because they may cause damage

or discoloration. If they do contact the

interior parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions that follow for the

proper way to clean vinyl.

G230202AUN-EA

Cleaning the upholstery and interior

trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean with a mild soap solution recom-

mended for upholstery or carpets.

Remove fresh spots immediately with a

fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not

receive immediate attention, the fabric

can be stained and its colour can be

affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties

can be reduced if the material is not

properly maintained.

G230203AUN

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-

bing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for cleaning

upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-

tions provided with the soap. Do not

bleach or re-dye the webbing because

this may weaken it.

G230204AUN

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-

cle become fogged (that is, covered with

an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should

be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the

directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with

electrical/electronic components

inside the vehicle as this may dam-

age them.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may affect

the fabric’s appearance and fire-

resistant properties.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the inside

of the rear window. This may result

in damage to the rear window

defroster grid.

CAUTION

When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alcohol

content solutions. If you use high

alcohol content solutions or acid/

alkaline detergents, the color of the

leather may fade or the surface may

get stripped off.

769

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

G270000AEN-EA

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty infor-

mation contained in the Service Passport

in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-

sion control system to meet all Australian

Design Rules (ADR) requirements.

There are three emission control sys-

tems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of

the emission control systems, it is rec-

ommended that you have your car

inspected and maintained by an autho-

rised HYUNDAI dealer in accordance

with the maintenance schedule in this

manual.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,

turn the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system off by pressing the

ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-

pleted, turn the ESC system back on

by pressing the ESC switch again.

G270100AUN

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-

tem is employed to prevent air pollution

caused by blow-by gases being emitted

from the crankcase.This system supplies

fresh filtered air to the crankcase through

the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,

which then pass through the PCV valve

into the induction system.

G270200AEN-EA

2. Evaporative emission control

system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapours from escaping into the atmos-

phere.

Maintenance

707

G270201AUN-EA

Canister

Fuel vapours generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapours absorbed in the

canister are drawn into the surge tank

through the purge control solenoid valve.

G270202AUN

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-

trolled by the Engine Control Module

(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-

ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-

es so that evaporated fuel is not taken

into the engine. After the engine warms-

up during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the

engine.

G270300AUN

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is

a highly effective system which controls

exhaust emissions whilst maintaining

good vehicle performance.

G270301BUN

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affect

its performance, safety or durability and

may even violate governmental safety

and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from any modification

may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorised electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to

operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-

tery discharge and fire. For your safety,

do not use unauthorised electronic

devices.

G270302AUN-EA

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside

your vehicle, have it inspected and

repaired immediately. If you ever sus-

pect exhaust fumes are coming into

your vehicle, drive it only with all the

windows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain car-

bon monoxide (CO). Though

colourless and odourless, it is dan-

gerous and could be lethal if

inhaled. Follow the instructions fol-

lowing to avoid CO poisoning.

771

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confined

or closed areas (such as garages) any

more than what is necessary to move

the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short time

with the engine running, adjust the

ventilation system (as needed) to draw

outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-

cle for any extended time with the

engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,

excessive attempts to restart the

engine may cause damage to the

emission control system.

G270303DEN-EA

Operating precautions for catalytic

converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic

converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions

must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for petrol

engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, such

as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-

formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.

Examples of misuse are coasting with

the ignition off and descending steep

grades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idle

speed for extended periods (5 minutes

or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part

of the engine or emission control sys-

tem. All inspections and adjustments

must be made by an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.

If you run out of petrol, it could cause

the engine to misfire and result in

excessive loading of the catalytic con-

verter.

Failure to observe these precautions

could result in damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your

warranties.

WARNING - Fire

• A hot exhaust system can ignite

flammable items under your vehi-

cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flammable

objects, such as grass, vegeta-

tion, paper, leaves, etc.

• The exhaust system and catalytic

system are very hot whilst the

engine is running or immediately

after the engine is turned off. Keep

away from the exhaust system

and catalytic, you may get burned.

Also, do not remove the heat sink

around the exhaust system, do

not seal the bottom of the vehicle

or do not coat the vehicle for cor-

rosion control. It may present a

fire risk under certain conditions.

CAUTION - Diesel Fuel

(if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regu-

lated automotive diesel fuel for

diesel vehicle equipped with the

DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high

sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)

and unspecified additives, it can

cause the DPF system to be dam-

aged and white smoke can be emit-

ted.

772

Maintenance

Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-2

Vehicle certification label / 8-2

Tyre specification and pressure label / 8-3

Engine number / 8-3

Consumer information

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN)

H010000BTQ

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

the number used in registering your vehi-

cle and in all legal matters pertaining to

its ownership, etc.

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the

top of the instrument panel. The number

on the plate can easily be seen through

the windshield from outside.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

H020000AUN-EA

The vehicle certification label attached

on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side

centre pillar gives the vehicle identifica-

tion number (VIN).

OTQ087002

OTQ087001

OEN086004N

VIN label (if equipped)

Frame number

Consumer information

TYRE SPECIFICATION AND

PRESSURE LABEL

H030000AUN-EA

The tyres supplied on your new vehicle

are chosen to provide the best perform-

ance for normal driving.

The tyre label located on the driver's side

centre pillar gives the tyre pressures rec-

ommended for your car.

ENGINE NUMBER

H04000AUN

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown in the drawing.

OTQ087003/H

OTQ087004

B060D01P

Petrol engine

Diesel engine

Dimensions / 9-2

Bulb wattage / 9-2

Tyres and wheels / 9-3

Recommended lubricants and capacities / 9-4

Specifications

Item mm (in)

Overall length 5125 (201.8)

Overall width 1920 (75.6)

Overall height 1925 (75.8)

Front tread 1685 (66.3)

Rear tread 1660 (65.4)

Wheelbase 3200 (126.0)

DIMENSIONS

Light Bulb Wattage

Headlights (Low) 55

Headlights (High) 55

Front turn signal lights 21

Position lights 5

Side repeater lights* 5

Front fog lights* 27

Rear fog light* 21

Stop and tail lights 21/5

Rear turn signal lights 21

Back-up lights 16

High mounted stop light* 5

License plate lights 5

Room lamps 10

Luggage lamp* 10

Step lamp* 5

BULB WATTAGE

* : If equipped

The above dimensions are based on 8-seater vehicle.

I010000ATQ-EA I030000ATQ

Specifications

TYRES AND WHEELS

* Normal load : Up to 3 persons

I020000BTQ-EA

Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)

Wagon

Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

215/70R16C 6.5Jx16

2.9 3.25 2.9 3.5 2.9 3.5

(42, 290) (47,325) (42, 290) (51,350) (42, 290) (51,350)

Full size tyre

Wheel nut torque

kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)

9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

Item

Tyre

size

Wheel size

Normal load *

Maximum load

Van

Specifications

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

I040000HTQ-EA

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page 9-6.

Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing

the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s

time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

VGT : Variable Geometry Turbocharger

WGT : Waste Gate Turbocharger

If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *

(drain and refill)

Diesel engine

7.4 l (7.82 US qt.)

VGT*

: API Service CH-4 or above, ACEA B4

WGT*

: API Service CF-4 or above, ACEA B4

Petrol engine

5.1 l (5.39 US qt.)

API Service SM *

, ILSAC GF-4 or above

Engine oil consumption

Normal driving condition

MAX. 1 l /1500 km

Severe driving condition

MAX. 1 l /1000 km

Manual transaxle fluid

Diesel engine

3.0 l (3.17 US qt.)

API Service GL-4

SAE 75W/85

Petrol engine

1.95 l (2.06 US qt.)

Automatic transaxle fluid

Diesel engine

10.0 l (10.60 US qt.)

APOLLOIL ATF RED-1

Petrol engine

8.0 l (8.45 US qt.)

CASTLE AUTO FLUID T-IV,

DIAMOND ATF SP-I

Power steering

0.9~1.0 l

(0.95~1.06 US qt.)

PSF-3

Specifications

Lubricant Volume Classification

13 l (13.74 US qt.)

Coolant

10.2 l (10.8 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and water

10 l (10.75 US qt.) (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminium radiator)

7.1 l (7.5 US qt.)

Brake fluid 0.7~0.8 l (0.7~0.8 US qt.) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

The temperate zone (-30°C ~ 30°C) : API GL-4 (SAE 90)

Rear axle oil 2.1 l (2.23 US qt.) The torrid zone (30°C ~ ) : API GL-4 (SAE 140)

The frigid zone ( ~ -30°C) : API GL-5 (SAE 80)

Fuel 75 l (19.81 US gal.) -

Diesel engine

Petrol engine

Diesel engine

Petrol engine

Wagon

Van

Specifications

I040100CUN-EA

Recommended SAE viscosity

number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an

effect on fuel economy and cold weather

operating (engine start and engine oil

flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils

can provide better fuel economy and cold

weather performance, however, higher

viscosity engine oils are required for sat-

isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using

oils of any viscosity other than those rec-

ommended could result in engine dam-

age.

When choosing an oil, consider the range

of temperature your vehicle will be oper-

ated in before the next oil change.

Proceed to select the recommended oil

viscosity from the chart.

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain plug, or

dipstick before checking or drain-

ing any lubricant. This is especially

important in dusty or sandy areas

and when the vehicle is used on

unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug

and dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the engine

and other mechanisms that could

be damaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Petrol

Engine Oil *

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Diesel

Engine Oil

5W-30

15W-40

10W-30

0W-30

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-

20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select

the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

2. It is only for extreme cold area and to be restricted by driving condition and area.

(Especially, not recommended for sustained high loaded and high speed operation.)

20W-50

10W-30

15W-40

5W-20, 5W-30

2016 Hyundai H-1 (Grand Starex)

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Hyundai 2016 HYUNDAI H-1 (GRAND STAREX) Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor L17040C101&L17040T101 Truck Cargo Mat & Backrest Mat TPE Custom Fit for Hyundai Palisade 2020-2024

Hyundai HYSW1500E 1500W 32cm Electric Artificial Grass Sweeper and Lawn Brush

Vevor HP121 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Kia Hyundai Santa 35320-2G720 35320-2G740

Vevor HP156 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Hyundai Accent/Sonata Tucson Veloster Kia Rio

Pyle PHYELANT16 2016 Hyundai Elantra Replacement Stereo

Hyundai HY-T26 True Wireless Earphones